User Manual

ManualsBrandsCasio ManualsDo-It-Yourself toolsfx-9860GII, fx-9860GII SD

CASIO ﻮﻴﺳﺎﻛ ﻲﳌﺎﻌﻟﺍ ﻲﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﺐﻳﻮﻟﺍ ﻊﻗﻮﻣ

https://edu.casio.com

ﻊﻗﻮﳌﺍ ﻲﻓ ﺕﺎﻐﻟ ﺓﺪﻌﺑ ﺓﺮﻓﻮﺘﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﺒﻴﺘﻛ

https://world.casio.com/manual/calc/

(2.11

ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ

)

fx-9860GII SD

(2.11

ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ

)

fx-9860GII

(2.09

ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ

)

fx-9860G AU PLUS

(2.04

ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ

)

fx-9750GII

(2.04

ﺭﺍﺪﺻﻹﺍ

)

fx-7400GII

ﺮﻳﻮﺘﻓﻮﺴﻟﺍ

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﳌﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

Summary of content (475 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪AR‬‬ ‫‪fx-9860GII SD‬‬ ‫‪) fx-9860GII‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.11‬‬ ‫‪) fx-9860G AU PLUS‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.09‬‬ ‫‪) fx-9750GII‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.04‬‬ ‫‪) fx-7400GII‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.04‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺘﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﳌﻲ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪CASIO‬‬ ‫‪https://edu.casio.com‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪https://world.casio.
PAGE 2
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫‪.10‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪1-1........................................................................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪1-2..........................................................................................................................................................................
PAGE 4
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪6-1..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪6-4...........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪6-10 ....................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ 12-1 ............................................................................................................................................‫ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬.1 12-1 .........................................................................................................................................................‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬.2 ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ 13-1 .............................................................................................
PAGE 6
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ – ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﹼﻻ ﹰ‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳕﺎﺫﺝ‪ -‬ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺭﲟﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳌﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ fx-9860GII SD‬ﻭ ﻟﺮﲟﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﻛﻠﺔ ﻻﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻗﻮﺳﲔ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ )‪ 1(COMP‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ }‪ {COMP‬ﻭﺍﳌﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻝ )‪ (g‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ 6‬ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 9
‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﳌﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 10
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻻﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﺎﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪STAT‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻼﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺪ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪TVM*1‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪E-CON2*3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻴﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﻣﺤﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ‪ EA-200‬ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪E-CON3*2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" ﺍﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LINK‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MEMORY‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪ u‬ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1.2E+12‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ 1.2 × 1012‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪ 1.2‬ﺍﺛﻨﻰ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﲔ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪1.200.000.000.000‬‬ ‫‪ 1.2E–03‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﰋ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝ ‪ 1.2 × 10–3‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺮﻙ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ 1.2‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻻﺱ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪.0.0012‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﲔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪10–2 (0.01) > |x|, |x| > 1010 ......................
PAGE 13
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ‪.‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ .w‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻞ‪ .*1‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ ..!D(INS‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻛﺎ ”‪ “I‬ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻛـ ” “ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ e‬ﺍﻭ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ e‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪d‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .
PAGE 15
‫‪w‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﳌﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﺎﳋﻄﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪db‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﹼ ﺬ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ) ﺃﻭ ﻗﹼﺺ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ " )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 16
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(CUT‬ﻟﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.!j(PASTE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫)‪!j(PASTE‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 17
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪A!e(CATALOG)I(C)c~cw‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺗﻠﻮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻬﻢ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻭ‪ fx-9750GII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Math‬ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ " ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺧﺮﺍﺝ" ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‪(1-29‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺗﻚ‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ "ﺑﺎﻳﺖ" ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } ... {MAT‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {2×2‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ‪ 2 × 2‬ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {3×3‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ‪ 3 × 3‬ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {m×n‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ m‬ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ‪) n‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪{(6 × 6‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {2×1‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ‪ 2 × 1‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {3×1‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ‪ 3 × 1‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {1×2‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ‪ 1 × 2‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {1×3‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ‪ 1 × 3‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {logab‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻡ }‪{logab‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 20
f e )x w 1 1+ 0 x + 1dx ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ :3 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ Ab+4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) v+b ea fb e w 2× 1 2 2 2 1 2 ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ Ac*4(MATH)1(MAT)1(2×2) vbcc ee !x(')ce 1-13 :4 ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
PAGE 21
‫‪e!x(')ceevbcc‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺳﻬﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺮﻯ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ) ‪ 120‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫'‬ ‫)'(‪!x‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺬﺭ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫)'‪!((3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫)'‪!M(x‬‬ ‫‪ex‬‬ ‫‪10x‬‬ ‫)‪log(a,b‬‬ ‫)‪!I(ex‬‬ ‫)‪!l(10x‬‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)2(logab‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)3(Abs‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)4(d/dx‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ Σ‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)5(d2/dx2‬‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)6(g‬‬ ‫)‪1(∫dx‬‬ ‫)‪4(MATH)6(g‬‬ ‫) (‪2(Σ‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪
PAGE 23
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ (w‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻟﻺﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺍ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ)‪aD(UNDO‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﲤﺎﻣﺎ ﹰ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ)‪.aD(UNDO‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ .A‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪ A‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺩﺭﺟﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪aD(UNDO‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 24
‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،1 × 6‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .6 × 1‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،VctAns‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،ListAns‬ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻣﺶ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻓﻚ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.
PAGE 25
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪A2v5e+3!v(()1e4w‬‬ ‫‪2 + 3 1 = 73‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4 20‬‬ ‫‪1.5 + 2.3i = 3 + 23 i‬‬ ‫‪2 10‬‬ ‫‪A1.5+2.
PAGE 27
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪×8‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪bebvceedde‬‬ ‫‪bdveeefege‬‬ ‫‪*iw‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻝ ‪Mat J‬‬ ‫‪!c(Mat)!-(Ans)a‬‬ ‫‪!c(Mat)a)(J)w‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ D‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪.
PAGE 28
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (1-11‬ﻭ "ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (1-18‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.RUN • MAT‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻟﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ RUN • MAT‬ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ ، e • ACT‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ’’ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪EQUA‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ EQUA‬ﻟﻼﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ))‪ (1(SIML‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ))‪ ، (2(POLY‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ‪،‬ﻭ '‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ π‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ ))‪ ، (3(SOLV‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ‪ x2 + 3x + 5 = 0‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 30
‫• }‪} ... {ANGL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪،‬ﻭ ﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {ESYM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {PICT‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {FMEM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {LOGIC‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {CAPT‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {TVM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ{‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "‪ "Math‬ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ‪ PICT‬ﻭ ‪ FMEM‬ﻭ ‪ CAPT‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 31
‫• }‪} ... {Y‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪{y-‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {y}/{Σy}/{Σy2}/{Σxy}/{σx}/{sy}/{minY}/{maxY‬ﻭﺳﻂ{‪}/‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ{‪}/‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ{‪}/‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪x-‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪}/{y-‬ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{‪}/‬ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ{‪}/‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{‪}/‬ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {GRPH‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {a}/{b}/{c}/{d}/{e‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {r.}/{r2‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ{‪}/‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {MSe‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Q1}/{Q3‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺃﻻﻭﻝ‪}/{-‬ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 32
‫• }‪=X} ... {X‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ{‬ ‫• ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫*‪ — DYNA‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{‪}/‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{{‪}/‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪ — TABL‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺇﺣﺘﻮﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Strt}/{End}/{Pitch‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺃ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‪}/‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‪}/‬ﺗﺰﺍﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 33
‫‪ .7‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(PRGM‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪ (PRGM‬ﺃﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ‪ (RUN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ PRGM‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ .!J(PRGM‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪.(PRGM‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ (PRGM‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Math‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ........ {COM‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{‬ ‫• }‪} .......... {CTL‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ{‬ ‫• }‪} ....... {JUMP‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ{‬ ‫• }?{ ‪} .............‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ{‬ ‫• }^{ ‪} .........
PAGE 34
‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ !m(SET UP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﹰ ﳑﻜﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ) ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ( 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﲤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Real‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {a+bi}/{r∠θ‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ}ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{‪}/‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪) Coord‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {On}/{Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‪}/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {On}/{Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‪}/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ) ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {On}/{Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‪}/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 36
‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ* ) ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Cnt}/{Stop‬ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ)ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ({‪}/‬ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ 10‬ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ* )ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {On}/{Off‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ{‪}/‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪=Y‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ* ) ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Norm}/{High‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ{‪}/‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ{‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ) ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 37
‫‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {On}/{Off‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ{‪}/‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ{ﺻﻴﻎ ﺁﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ) ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Form}/{Val‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ{*‪}/1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺮﻳﻚ )ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ(*‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Low}/{Right‬ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ{‪}/‬ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ{‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺷﻜﻼ" )ﺻﻴﻐﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ، 1‬ﻭﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪. J‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻻﻣﺮ ‪ RclCapt‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻﻗﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪...‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﳌﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﻘﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪. 5(RSET‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ , 1(STUP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ)‪.1(Yes‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 39
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(12-3‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﺣﻔﻈﺎ ﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ -‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﲡﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑـ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻭﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8‬‬ ‫‪56*-12/-2.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪٢‬‬ ‫‪200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪200/7*14w‬‬ ‫‪400‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ‪٣‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP) ff‬‬ ‫‪1(Fix)dwJw‬‬ ‫‪400.000‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻝ ‪ ١٠‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪200/7w‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪14w‬‬ ‫‪28.571‬‬ ‫‪Ans × I‬‬ ‫‪400.000‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍ‪‬ﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪', 3', log, In, ex, 10x, sin, cos, tan, sin–1, cos–1, tan–1, sinh, cosh, tanh, sinh–1, cosh–1,‬‬ ‫‪tanh–1, (–), d, h, b, o, Neg, Not, Det, Trn, Dim, Identity, Ref, Rref, Sum, Prod, Cuml,‬‬ ‫‪Percent, AList, Abs, Int, Frac, Intg, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ، A‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ ، C‬ﻭ ﺍﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪ u‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ '‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ' ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺪﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ' ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫'‪b ± d‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫'‪± a‬‬ ‫'‪b, ± d ± a‬‬ ‫'‪b, ± a‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ )‪ (a، b، c، d، e، f‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫'‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪ u‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪π‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ π‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪nπ‬‬ ‫‪ n‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻲ |‪.|106‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ π‬ﺃﻭ ‪a π‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪b b‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ‪} ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ + a‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ +b‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ {c‬ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪c c‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ c‬ﺛﻼﺙ‪.*2‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪*1*2 .
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫))‪6 ÷ (2(1 + 2‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪6 ÷ 2(1 + 2‬‬ ‫))‪6 ÷ (A(1 + 2‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪6 ÷ A(1 + 2‬‬ ‫)‪1 ÷ ((2 + 3)sin30‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫‪1 ÷ (2 + 3)sin30‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺏ‪ 28‬ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻠﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ‪ plus r ،‬ﻭ ‪ . θ‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﹼ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺣﲔ ﺇﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻗﻴﻤﺔ[ ‪] a‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ[ ‪w‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪١‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ‪ 123‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪.
PAGE 47
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[FMEM‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻃﻮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻨﺼﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ GRAPH‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {STO}/{RCL}/{fn}/{SEE‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{‪}/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{‪}/‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ{‪}/‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ{‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫*)‪K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM‬‬ ‫)‪4(SEE‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 2(FMEM‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪١‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫*)‪K6(g)6(g)3(FMEM‬‬ ‫‪1(STO)bw‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 2(FMEM‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪) w‬ﻭﺍﻻ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪w‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ( ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﲔ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(1-17‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻔﺎ )‪ (faal(B)w‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ )‪(Fix‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪1(Fix)cw‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫)‪.(n = 0 to 9‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )‪(Sci‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪2(Sci)dw‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ )‪.(n = 0 to 9‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 0‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﳌﻌﺘﺒﺮﺓ ‪.10‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪ .4‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪. K‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ‪ (RUN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.PRGM‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ )‪(HYP‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[HYP‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {sinh}/{cosh}/{tanh‬ﺯﺍﺋﺪﻳﺔ }‪{sine}/{cosine}/{tangent‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 52
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ )‪(ANGL‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[ANGL‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {°}/{r}/{g‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ{‪}/‬ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ{ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• }” ’ ‪} ... {°‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪،‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ /‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• }” ’ ‪} ... {°‬ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ /‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ{‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ }” ’ ‪ {°‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪ ...
PAGE 53
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪cos ( π rad) = 0.5‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc*2(Rad)J‬‬ ‫‪c(!E(π)/3)w‬‬ ‫‪!m(SET UP)cccccc*1(Deg)J 2 • sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775‬‬ ‫‪2*s45*c65w*1‬‬ ‫‪sin–10.5 = 30°‬‬ ‫‪!s(sin–1) 0.5*2w‬‬ ‫)‪sin x = 0.5‬ﺣﲔ ‪(x‬‬ ‫‪* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccccc‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ *‪.‬‬ ‫‪ *2‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 54
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Comp‬ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪!x(') 2+!x(')5w‬‬ ‫'‬ ‫'‪2 +‬‬ ‫‪5 = 3.65028154‬‬ ‫‪(–3)2 = (–3) × (–3) = 9‬‬ ‫‪(-3)xw‬‬ ‫‪8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × .... × 8) = 40320‬‬ ‫‪8K6(g)3(PROB)*11(x!)w‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻝ ‪- 3.5‬؟‬ ‫‪K6(g)4(NUM)*22(Int)-3.
PAGE 55
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ‪RanList#‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪RanList# (4‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫)‪K6(g)3(PROB)*4(RAND)5(List‬‬ ‫‪4)w‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(ListAns‬‬ ‫)‪JK6(g)3(PROB)*4(RAND‬‬ ‫)‪RanList# (3, 1‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(ListAns‬‬ ‫‪5(List) 3,1)w‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(ListAns‬‬ ‫‪Jw‬‬ ‫‪J1(Ran#) 0w‬‬ ‫‪Ran# 0‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻬﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ(‬ ‫‪5(List) 3,1)w‬‬ ‫)‪Ran
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫)‪K6(g)3(PROB)*4(RAND)3(Norm‬‬ ‫‪8,68)w‬‬ ‫)‪RanNorm# (8, 68‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺼﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﳉﺴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ 68‬ﺳﻢ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ‪(.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ‪ r‬ﻭ ‪ θ°‬ﺣﲔ ‪ x = 14‬ﻭ ‪y = 20.7‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪24.98979792 (r‬‬ ‫) ‪55.92839019 (θ‬‬ ‫‪24.989‬‬ ‫‪55.928‬‬ ‫*‪!m(SET UP)cccccc‬‬ ‫‪1(Deg)J‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)(‪K6(g)5(ANGL)**6(g)1(Pol‬‬ ‫‪14,20.7)wJ‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ y‬ﺣﲔ ‪ r = 25‬ﻭ ‪56° = θ‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫→‬ ‫)‪13.97982259 (x‬‬ ‫)‪20.72593931 (y‬‬ ‫‪13.979‬‬ ‫‪20.
PAGE 58
‫‪ k‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ )‪ ، (MOD‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻲ )‪(MOD Exp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ‪ 137‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪7‬‬ ‫‪K6(g)4(NUM)*6(g)4(MOD) 137,7‬‬ ‫‪)w‬‬ ‫)‪(MOD (137, 7) = 4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ‪ 53‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪K6(g)4(NUM)*6(g)5(MOD • E‬‬ ‫‪5,3,3)w‬‬ ‫)‪(MOD • E (5, 3, 3) = 2‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 3(NUM‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪3(ENG)*1‬‬ ‫)‪= 0.0009k (kilo‬‬ ‫‪= 0.9‬‬ ‫‪2(ENG)*2‬‬ ‫‪= 900m‬‬ ‫‪2(ENG)*3‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 5(ESYM‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ *2‬ﲢﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ )‪(AND, OR, NOT, XOR‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LOGIC‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ AND} ...
PAGE 60
‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ K4(CALC) (3(CALC‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Int÷}/{Rmdr}/{Simp‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ{‪}/‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ{‪}/‬ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Solve}/{d/dx}/{d2/dx2}/{∫dx}/{SolvN‬ﺣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ{‪}/‬ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ{‪}/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ{‪/‬‬ ‫}ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ{‪}/‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪{f(x‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 61
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ”ﺁﻟﻲ“ ﻟـ ”ﻳﺪﻭﻱ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(1-29‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “r∠θ‬ﺍﻭ ”‪ “a+bi‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ“‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻴﻂ ”ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ“‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ )ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ( ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Real‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﳌﻌﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ )ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.4-4‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ‪ ،Σ‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ‪ /‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ A‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻞ )ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[d/dx‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺍﻭﻻ ﹰ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 64
‫• ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﻘﻂ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪x‬‬‫ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (Rad‬ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 65
‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ )‪ (tol‬ﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ )‪ (tol‬ﻝ ‪ 1E–14‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ )ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺼﻴﻞ ﺣﻞ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪tol = 1E – 4‬‬ ‫‪(2x2 + 3x + 4) dx‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪f (x‬‬ ‫‪AK4(CALC)* 4(∫dx)cvx+dv+e,‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 3(CALC‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b,f,‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ ،f(x‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ X‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪ (,X, r, θ‬ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﺜﻮﺍﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺻﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ )‪ (tol‬ﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﲔ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺬﻓﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ )‪ ، (tol‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻝ ‪1E–5‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪ k‬ﻷﺩﻧﻰ ‪ /‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CALC]-[FMin]/[FMax‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﺼﻲ ‪ /‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳉﻤﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺡ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 2-1‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪.2-15‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {Real‬ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪*1‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 70
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[i‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 71
‫)‪AK3(CPLX)*2(Abs‬‬ ‫‪(d+e1(i))w‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻘﺔ(‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫)‪AK3(CPLX)*3(Arg‬‬ ‫‪(d+e1(i))w‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ(‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﺔ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[CPLX]-[Conj‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪ a + bi‬ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺎ ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﻜﻞ ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫' ‪ 1 +‬ﺍﻟﻲ ﺷﻜﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪3 i‬‬ ‫*‪!m(SET UP)cccccc‬‬ ‫‪1(Deg)c2(a+bi)J‬‬ ‫)‪Ab+(!x(')d‬‬ ‫‪K3(CPLX)**1(i)6(g)3('r∠θ)w‬‬ ‫‪* fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccccc‬‬ ‫)‪** fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫‪Ac!v(∠)ga‬‬ ‫‪K3(CPLX)*6(g)4('a+bi)w‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 2(CPLX‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺐ ‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 21‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﻠﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪،12310‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺳﺖ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪!m(SET UP‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪3(Hex)J‬‬ ‫‪A1(d~o)1(d)bcdw‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(LOG‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Neg‬ﺳﺎﻟﺐ{ ‪*1‬‬ ‫• }‪{NOT}*2/{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}*3 ...
PAGE 75
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪) 2210‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪A!m(SET UP‬‬ ‫ﲢﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.2(Dec)J‬‬ ‫‪1(d~o)1(d)ccw‬‬ ‫‪J3(DISP)3('Bin)w‬‬ ‫‪4('Oct)w‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪. fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،RUN • MAT‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1('MAT‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1('MAT‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) m × n … m‬ﺻﻒ( ‪) × n‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ( ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ …None‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DEL}/{DEL•A‬ﻳﺤﺬﻑ }ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ{‪}/‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DIM‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ) ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ({‬ ‫ﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2-49‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {M⇔V‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﲔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻭﹼﻻ )ﺍﳊﺠﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪..‬‬ ‫‪bwcwdw‬‬ ‫‪ewfwgw‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪ ،w‬ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺴﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(R • OP‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Swap‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {×Rw‬ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {×Rw+‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Rw+‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺻﻔﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻔﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪1(R • OP)4(Rw+‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪cw‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪dww‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DEL‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {INS‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ{‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 80
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {DEL‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {INS‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {ADD‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ{‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪3(COL)e‬‬ ‫)‪1(DEL‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RUN • MAT‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ K‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 2(MAT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ...
PAGE 81
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪:A‬‬ ‫‪1 3 5‬‬ ‫‪2 4 6‬‬ ‫‪!+( [ )!+( [ )b,d,f‬‬ ‫‪!-( ] )!+( [ )c,e,g‬‬ ‫)‪!-( ] )!-( ] )aK2(MAT‬‬ ‫)‪1(Mat)av(A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ n‬ﻫﻰ ‪. 999‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Iden‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪ u‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﳌﻸ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳉﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻭﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Mat‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﳉﻤﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﲔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫=‪B‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫=‪A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)5(Aug‬‬ ‫‪1(Mat)av(A),‬‬ ‫‪1(Mat)al(B)w‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﺍﻟﻠﺘﲔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺠﻤﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺘﲔ ﲢﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﻮﻑ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Mat‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪ ) Mat‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Det‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪ ) Det‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ({‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Trn‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪) Trn‬ﺃﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ({‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Iden‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ) ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ({‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Ref‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪ )Ref‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ({‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Rref‬ﺃﻣﺮ ‪ ) Rref‬ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ({‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 85
‫• ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ 3×3‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪= a11a22a33 + a12a23a31 + a13a21a32 – a11a23a32 – a12a21a33 – a13a22a31‬‬ ‫‪a11 a12 a13‬‬ ‫‪a21 a22 a23‬‬ ‫‪a31 a32 a33‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫= |‪|A‬‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Trn‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺻﻔﻮﻓﺎ‪.
PAGE 86
‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)5(Rref‬‬ ‫‪6(g)1(Mat)av(A)w‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[x–1‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫= ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)1(Mat‬‬ ‫‪av(A)!)(x–1)w‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺴﻬﺎ ) ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ(‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ .
PAGE 87
‫‪ u‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]^[‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫= ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)1(Mat)av(A‬‬ ‫‪Mdw‬‬ ‫• ﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳑﻜﻨﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪MatAns → Mat α‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ α‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ .Z‬ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻢ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RUN • MAT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.
PAGE 89
‫• }‪ ... {DEL}/{DEL • A‬ﺣﺬﻑ }ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ{‪}/‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪ ... {DIM‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )‪ m‬ﺻﻔﻮﻑ × ‪ 1‬ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺻﻒ × ‪ n‬ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(2-37‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {M⇔V‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ )ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮﻫﺎ( ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (2-37‬ﻭ ”ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .(2-38‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﲡﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺘﺠﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪ u‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Vct‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪.Vct‬‬ ‫‪a11‬‬ ‫]‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪[a11 a12 ... a1n] → Vct [A‬‬ ‫‪...‬‬ ‫]‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪→ Vct [A‬‬ ‫‪a21‬‬ ‫‪am1‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪[ 1 2 3 ] :Vct A‬‬ ‫‪!+( [ )!+( [ )b,c,d‬‬ ‫‪!-( ] )!-( ] )a‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)1(Vct‬‬ ‫‪av(A)w‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ ﻟﻜﻞﹼ ﻣﻦ ‪ m‬ﻭ ‪ n‬ﻫﻲ ‪.999‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﻣﺘﻸﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )‪:(Mat A × Vct B‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫= ‪Vct B‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫= ‪Mat A‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)1(Mat‬‬ ‫)‪av(A)*6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪1(Vct)al(B)w‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﲔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﺣﻤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )‪ Vct A (1 × n‬ﻭﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )‪ ، Vct B (m × 1‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ‪ n‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[UntV‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 5 5‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪5(UntV)1(Vct)av(A))w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫)ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[MAT]-[Norm‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺣﺠﻤﻪ(‬ ‫] ‪Vct A = [ 1 3‬‬ ‫)‪K2(MAT)6(g)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫)‪1(Norm)6(g)6(g)6(g‬‬ ‫‪1(Vct)av(A))w‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ”‪ “Norm‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ {1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ }ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪ {2‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻣﺮ ' ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ )'(‪ 1‬ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪fm‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺮﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪cm3‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪Å‬‬ ‫ﺍﳒﺴﺘﺮﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪mL‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪μm‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪cm‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪in3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻣﻜﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ft3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪km‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪AU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪mm‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪m3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫)‪fl_oz(UK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻧﺲ‬ ‫)‪fl_oz(US‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﻧﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪l.y.
PAGE 95
‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪kPa‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪°F‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪mmH2O‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪°R‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻧﻜﲔ‬ ‫‪mmHg‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺯﺋﺒﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪m/s‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪km/h‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪knot‬‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪inHg‬‬ ‫‪ft/s‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪lbf/in2‬‬ ‫‪mile/h‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪bar‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﺫﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪kgf/cm2‬‬ ‫‪mg‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪°C‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻴﻠﻮﺯﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪Pa‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻴﺠﺮﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪atm‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﻮﻱ‬
PAGE 96
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﲤﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪3.
PAGE 97
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) { (*! ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺑﲔ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) } (‪ !/‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫) } (‪!*( { )g,h,i!/‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)3(DEL‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 99
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ !a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪. ALPHA-LOCK‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺳﻨﺔ‬ ‫‪-(Y)c(E)v(A)g(R)w‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪(RUN‬‬ ‫‪!b(List) n!+( [ )a!-( ] )w‬‬ ‫)‪ = n‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﳌﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻟـ "ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)1(TOOL)1(SRT • A‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ "ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ؟" ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﻔﺮﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﻧﺪﺧﻞ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪cw‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻭ ﺭﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ " ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ، ":‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻨﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪bw‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (2،3،6،5،4) 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ ،1‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫)‪ (11,12,13,14,15‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪AK1(LIST)2(L→M‬‬ ‫‪1(List)b,1(List)c)w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Dim‬‬ ‫‪> w‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)3(Dim)1(List) <26 - 1‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ"‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Seq‬‬ ‫>ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ< ‪> ,‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ< ‪> ,‬ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ< ‪> ,‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ< )‪K1(LIST)5(Seq‬‬ ‫‪> )w‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ< ‪,‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،112 ،62 ،12‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.f(x) = X2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 11‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 103
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Med‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ )ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ( ﻛﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﲔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 104
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫]‪[OPTN]-[LIST]-[Cuml‬‬ ‫‪> w‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪K1(LIST)6(g)6(g)3(Cuml)6(g)1(List) <1 - 26‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 105
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ .ListAns‬ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ ،‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪A‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ← 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪A‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ A‬ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻼﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 106
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ {, ,},‬ﻭ‪,‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪64 ،82 ،56 :‬‬ ‫‪!*( { )fg,ic,‬‬ ‫) } (‪ge!/‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ a‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ListAns‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ListAns‬ﺏ‪36‬‬ ‫‪K1(LIST)1(List)!-(Ans)*dgw‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ (Ans)-!(List)1(LIST)1K‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.ListAns‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ListAns‬ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻙ ‪ = Y1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 108
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﺎﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪.ListAns .‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪41‬‬ ‫‪65‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ‪(List 3) sin‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪sK1(LIST)1(List)dw‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 26‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (26‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.EQUA‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SIML‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {POLY‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪{6‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {SOLV‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ{‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪1 m EQUA‬‬ ‫)‪2 1(SIML‬‬ ‫)‪2(3‬‬ ‫‪3 ewbw-cw-bw‬‬ ‫‪bwgwdwbw‬‬ ‫‪-fwewbw-hw‬‬ ‫)‪4 1(SOLV‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ 10‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﲔ ﻟﻸﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 111
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ، w‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(CLR‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪ .3‬ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ Solve Calculation‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪EQUA‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) SOLV‬ﺍﳊﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪Graphing‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫)≤‪5(CONV)1('Y=) to 5('Y‬‬ ‫≤‪6(g)1('X=) to 5('X‬‬ ‫‪ ...‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫)≤‪ ....Y 6(g)1(Y>) to 4(Y‬ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫)≤‪ .... 6(g)6(g)1(X>) to 4(X‬ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪ X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(5-6‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳉﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 115
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) V-Window‬ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺎﻭﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪ ،y‬ﻭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‪.‬ﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 116
‫• ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ –9.999999999 97E‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪9.999999999E 97‬‬ ‫‪ V-Window k‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪V-Window Memory‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !3(V-WIN‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪. V-Window‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 4(STO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 117
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪!2(ZOOM)1(BOX) ...‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﲤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪2(FACT‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ y‬ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪3(IN)/4(OUT) ...‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻟﻠﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺓ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻻﻟﻲ ‪5(AUTO) ...
PAGE 118
‫)‪2 !2(ZOOM)1(BOX‬‬ ‫‪3 d~dw‬‬ ‫‪4 d~d,f~fw‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﺍ‪‬ﺗﻠﻔﺘﲔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﲔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺪﺩ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 119
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ Xt3‬ﻭ ‪:Yt3‬‬ ‫‪x = 3 sinT‬‬ ‫‪y = 3 cosT‬‬ ‫‪ ) 3(TYPE)3‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻱ (‬ ‫‪)dsvw‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪( x‬‬ ‫‪ )dcvw‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪( y‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ Y1‬ﻭ ‪ Y2‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻝ ‪ Y3‬ﻭ ‪Y4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Y1 = (X + 1), Y2 = X + 3‬‬ ‫‪ ,Y2 °Y1 to Y4.
PAGE 120
‫ﰎ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ "ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5-29‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ Y1‬ﻣﻦ ‪ y = 2x2 – 5‬ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪y = 2x2 – 3‬‬ ‫)ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ( ‪e‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ( ‪eeeeeDd‬‬ ‫) ﹼ‬ ‫)ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪﺓ( ‪w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﳕﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 121
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻴﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (Xt2‬ﺳﺘﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﳌﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ) ‪ ،Yt2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺴﺄﻟﺔ ‪(Xt2‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.1(SEL‬‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(SEL‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.
PAGE 122
‫‪ k‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.(20‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) V-Window‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 123
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻥ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،GRAPH‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ K1(PICT)2(RCL‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﳌﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .w,‬ﻳﺴﺘﺮﺩﹼ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ (Pict 1) 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.bw‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (5-28‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 124
‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 1(SEL‬ﺣﲔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ” ‪ “ B‬ﺃﻭ ” ‪. “ R‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ )‪ y = x(x + 1)(x – 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Xmin = –2,‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪Xscale = 0.
PAGE 125
‫‪3 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwcwc‬‬ ‫‪-bawbawfwJ‬‬ ‫‪4 !4(SKTCH)1(Cls)w‬‬ ‫)=‪5(GRPH)1(Y‬‬ ‫‪5 cvx+dv-ew‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 126
‫‪4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)av(A)vx-d,‬‬ ‫‪!+( [ )av(A)!.(=)d,b,-b‬‬ ‫‪!-( ] )w‬‬ ‫)‪5 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.T,θ,r,Y,X :‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 127
‫)‪1 m RUN • MAT (or RUN‬‬ ‫‪a-(Y)!.(=)v‬‬ ‫)‪!i(CLIP)ddd1(COPY‬‬ ‫‪2 mGRAPH‬‬ ‫‪3 !m(SET UP) cccc*3(Off)J‬‬ ‫‪*fx-7400GII, fx-9750GII: ccc‬‬ ‫‪4 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwcwc‬‬ ‫‪-bawbawfwJ‬‬ ‫‪5 3(TYPE)1(Y=)cvx+dv-ew‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫)‪6 !j(PASTE‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ"‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ ) .
PAGE 128
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﻣﻦ ‪ –3‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ، 3‬ﻟﻠﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪m TABLE‬‬ ‫)‪5(SET‬‬ ‫‪-dwdwbw‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲟﻮﺟﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ‪ ............‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪x‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ ...........‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪x‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ..........‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪) x‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ(‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 129
‫‪ u‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺄ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”‪“dy/dx‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﰎ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪.
PAGE 130
‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﲤﻨﺤﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﻧﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫)‪K1(LMEM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪bw‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 131
‫‪3 3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw‬‬ ‫‪vxw‬‬ ‫‪4 5(SET)-dwdwbwJ‬‬ ‫)‪5 6(TABL‬‬ ‫)‪6 5(G • CON‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ T+G‬ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.TABLE‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ T+G‬ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 132
‫‪ .8‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ !‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻼﺣﻆ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻛﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.DYNA‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫←‬ ‫↑↓‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫←‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻝ "ﻣﻮﺿﻊ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 134
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪DOT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ – ‪ X‬ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻝ ‪ =Y‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !m(SET UP‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ *‪ ccc‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ =Y‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪*fx-9750GII:cc‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ … 1(Norm‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –‪ ) .X‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫)‪ … 2(High‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ –‪) .
PAGE 135
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪3(TYPE) 1(an) ...{an‬‬ ‫}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ‪-‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ ‪2(an+1)...‬‬ ‫}ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ‪-‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﻮﺩﻱ{ ‪3(an+2)...‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻝ ‪ . n‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻻﻭﹼﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﻀﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 136
‫‪1 m RECUR‬‬ ‫‪2 !3(V-WIN)awgwbwc‬‬ ‫‪-bfwgfwfwJ‬‬ ‫‪3 3(TYPE)2(an+1)c2(an)+bw‬‬ ‫‪4 5(SET)2(a1)bwgwbwJ‬‬ ‫‪)J‬‬ ‫(‪5 1(SEL+S)f2‬‬ ‫)‪6 6(TABL‬‬ ‫)‪7 5(G • CON‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.
PAGE 137
‫)‪5 6(TABL‬‬ ‫)‪6 3(PHAS‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ RECUR‬ﻭ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭﻱ ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ 3(PHAS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ....... 1(a • b‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ bn (bn+1, bn+2‬ﻭ )‪an (an+1, an+2‬‬ ‫)‪ ....... 2(b • c‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ cn (cn+1, cn+2‬ﻭ )‪bn (bn+1, bn+2‬‬ ‫)‪ .......
PAGE 138
‫‪ k‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺪ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )‪ y = f(x‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ‪ an+1 = y, an = x‬ﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺤﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻄﻲ )‪ an+1 = f(an‬ﺍﳌﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪ . an+1, an‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RECUR‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺻﻨﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺤﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 139
‫‪ .10‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ !‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.CONICS‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ CONICS‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.CONICS‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫)‪} ....1(RECT‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ{‬ ‫)‪} ....2(POL‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻲ{‬ ‫)‪} ....3(PARM‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻳﺔ{‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 140
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﳕﻂ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ … 1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ )ﺍﻹﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‬ ‫)‬ ‫(‪ … 2‬ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ) ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫)‬ ‫(‪ … 3‬ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ )ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭ(‬ ‫)‬ ‫(‪ … 4‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ) ﺫﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ(‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪!4(SKTCH) 1(Cls) ...‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﳌﻤﺎﺱ ‪2(Tang) ...‬‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪3(Norm) ...
PAGE 141
‫‪4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+c)(v‬‬ ‫‪-c)w‬‬ ‫)‪5 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫)‪6 !4(SKTCH)2(Tang‬‬ ‫‪7 e~ew*1‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﳑﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ” “ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪. w‬‬ ‫‪ .12‬ﲢﻠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ،!1(TRCE‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪*1.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 142
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)‪ ، !1(TRCE‬ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﻄﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪ ،‬ﳑﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 143
‫‪ - y‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪4(Y-ICPT)...‬‬ ‫‪5(ISCT) ... I‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﲔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ ‪ -y‬ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪6(g)1(Y-CAL) ... x‬‬ ‫‪ - y‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪ - x‬ﺍﻹﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ ‪6(g)2(X-CAL) ... x‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪6(g)3(∫dx) ...‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 144
‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ )‪f(x) type‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ )‪ (Y > f(x), Y < f(x), Y t f(x) or Y s f(x‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻱ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﲔ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﲔ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪ y-‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪x‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻲ‪ x-‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.y‬‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 145
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ )‪.(–2 ,0‬‬ ‫)‪Y1 = x(x + 2)(x – 2‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.10-‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﻥ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ !‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.CONICS‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‪.
PAGE 146
‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫]‪[G-SLV]-[FOCS]/[LEN‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪(Y – 2)2 + 3 = X‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ !‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻪ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻰﺀ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 148
‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ List 1‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﺍﳌﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ List 1‬ﻭ ‪ List 2‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪-‬ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ x-‬ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.y-‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺀﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪ .
PAGE 149
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ( ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬ ‫• }‪} ... {LIST‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪{26‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ(‬ ‫• }‪ ... {%}/{Data‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ}ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ{‪}/‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ{‬ ‫• ‪) % Sto Mem‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 150
‫‪Pie, 1-Sample Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample t Test, 2‬‬‫)ﺗﻬﻤﻞ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ– ‪ x‬ﻓﻘﻂ( ‪Sample t Test, χ2 GOF Test, χ2 2-way Test, 2-Sample F Test‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪) x-‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪) y-‬ﻋﺮﺿﻲ(‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ x/y‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﹰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 151
‫⇒‬ ‫)‪w(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ – ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﲡﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )‪ (Q1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ ‫)‪ ،(Q3‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ )‪ .(Med‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺴﻤﺎﺓ ‪ (whiskers‬ﺍﳌﻤﺘﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫)‪ (minX‬ﺃﻗﺼﻰ )‪ (maxX‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 152
‫‪ k‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ‪ XList‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪ Freq‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﲢﺪﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻝ ‪Freq‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳌﻜﺴﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺰ ﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﺪﺭﹼﺝ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ‪ XList‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﲢﺪﺩ ‪ Freq‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﲢﺪﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻝ ‪ Freq‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 153
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(DRAW‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ Q1Q3‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺎ ”‪) “Std‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “OnData‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ( ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪Q1‬ﻭ ‪.Q3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Std‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ ، “OnData‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻝ"ﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Std‬ﻭ "‪ "OnData‬ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 154
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪2+3‬‬ ‫‪= Q1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪7+8‬‬ ‫‪= Q3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺭ ﻋﺸﺮﻳﺔ )‪ fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/fx-9860G AU PLUS‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q3‬ﻭ ‪ Med‬ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪} = Q1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.25‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪{0.25‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 0.
PAGE 155
‫‪OnData u‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Q1‬ﻭ ‪ Q3‬ﻭ ‪ Med‬ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪} = Q1‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.25‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪{0.25‬‬ ‫‪} = Q3‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 0.75‬ﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪{0.75‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻻ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﳌﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪(10 :‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1/10 = 0.1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2/10 = 0.2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4/10 = 0.
PAGE 156
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪xy‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪. xy‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪)Scat‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﺘﻔﺮﻕ( ﺍﻭ ‪) xy‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪(xy‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A J‬ﺃﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ‪0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2‬‬ ‫)‪ y‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ( ‪–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4‬‬ ‫‪1 m STAT‬‬ ‫‪2 a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe‬‬ ‫‪-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew‬‬ ‫)‪1(GRPH)6(SET)c1(Scat)J1(GPH1‬‬ ‫)‪3 1(CALC)6(g)2(Log‬‬ ‫)‪4 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺛﺮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺛﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪ k‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 6(DRAW‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﳝﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﳑﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ‪) y-‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪ y-‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ x = 0‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﲤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ‪.
PAGE 159
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫‪ ........ y = ax3 + bx2 + cx + d‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪b .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪c .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪d .........‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪(y-‬‬ ‫‪ ............ y = ax2 + bx + c‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪b .........‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪c .........‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪(y-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪................. y = ax4 + bx3 + cx2 + dx + e‬ﳕﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a ...........
PAGE 160
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻦ ‪ y‬ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻝ ‪ .x‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪، y = a × xb‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﻧﺎ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﲔ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ = y‬ﻓﻲ × ‪ a + b‬ﻓﻲ ‪ . x‬ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ‪= x‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ ، x‬ﻭ ‪ = y‬ﻓﻲ ‪ , y‬ﻭ ‪ = A‬ﻓﻲ ‪ ،a‬ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ ‪.Y = A + bX‬‬ ‫)‪1(CALC)6(g)4(Pwr‬‬ ‫)‪6(DRAW‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﳕﻂ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪y = a·x‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪a.............‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪b.................
PAGE 161
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫) ‪ "“List 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ"‪ ("List 26‬ﻝ‪ ."“Resid List‬ﻭ ﲢﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ‪ .
PAGE 162
‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﰎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(CALC)6(SET‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻘﻴﻢ ‪) x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1Var XList...........
PAGE 163
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(CALC)2(2VAR‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﻴﻤﺮﹼﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6-15‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻲ" ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ" ‪ ،‬ﰎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .
PAGE 164
‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫))‪Σ (y – (ax + b‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (y – (a + bx‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪+ bxi + c))2‬‬ ‫‪Σ (y – (ax‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (y – (ax + bx + cx + d‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪+ cxi2 + dxi + e))2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪Σ (y – (ax + bx‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (y – (a + b ln x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)) ‪Σ (ln y – (ln a + bx‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪i=1‬‬ ‫‪n‬‬
PAGE 165
‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ v‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﳌﺪﺧﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺴﻮﺑﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ”‪ “Coord‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Y-CAL‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪.
PAGE 166
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪RUN • MAT‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ‪.(RUN‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(PROB))K6(g)3(PROB‬ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪ 6(g)(fx-7400GII‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪ ... {P(}/{Q(}/{R‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ }‪ {(P(t)}/{Q(t)}/{R(t‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }(‪} ... {t‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟـ )‪{t(x‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )‪ R(t), P(t), Q(t‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝ )‪ t(x‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 167
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ , m‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،(RUN‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪K6(g)3(PROB‬‬ ‫))‪ 2(PROB‬ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ‪ (fx-7400GII‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ (PROB‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3(PROB)*6(g)4(t() bga.f)w‬‬ ‫)‪* fx-7400GII: 2(PROB‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ t‬ﻝ‪ 160.5‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪–1.633855948‬‬ ‫)‪( –1.634‬‬ ‫‪4(t() bhf.f)w‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ t‬ﻝ‪ 175.5‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪0.4963343361 :‬‬ ‫)‪( 0.496‬‬ ‫)‪1(P()a.ejg‬‬‫‪1(P()-b.gde)w‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪0.638921 :‬‬ ‫)ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪( 63.9%‬‬ ‫‪3(R()a.
PAGE 168
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.RUN • MAT‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪K5(STAT)3(DIST)1(NORM‬‬ ‫‪1(NPd)!*( { )b,c,d‬‬ ‫‪!/( } ),b.f,c)w‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺎ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(8-29‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺻﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 169
‫‪ k‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪TEST‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (RUN‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PRGM‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﳌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ ‪ STAT‬ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪، Z‬ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ،t‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 170
‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻻﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‪ .
PAGE 171
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(CALC‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫• )‪ ... 6(DRAW‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺴﲔ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.Z‬‬ ‫• )‪ ...
PAGE 172
‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪2(2-S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ......... μ1≠μ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ ............. sx1‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .............
PAGE 173
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ≠‪ .............0.5‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ x‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﳌﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪-2 .‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪4(2-P‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪p1>p2............‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ p1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.
PAGE 174
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ–‪ p‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(P‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺰﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ t‬ﻭ ‪ p‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ T‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ‪.‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ t‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪. t‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪2(t‬‬ ‫)‪1(1-S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ μ1≠μ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .............. sp‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻊ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ μ1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ LinearReg u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪-‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﻭﺍﺝ )‪ (x, y‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ a, b‬ﺍﻷﻧﺴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ‪ .y = a + bx‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ،t‬ﻭ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﲔ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻝ ‪ LinearReg‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.t‬‬ ‫• ]‪ [Save Res‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪ β & ρ‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻂ ‪.2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑـ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ [Res‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ]‪ [Resid List‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .....................CNTRB‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ χ2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ χ2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍ‪‬ﻣﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ χ2‬ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻉ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺘﻤﻠﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ /‬ﻻ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪3(CHI‬‬ ‫)‪2(2WAY‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣ ﹼﺪﺩ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪4(F‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ........ σ1≠σ2‬ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .............. x¯1‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .............. x¯2‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(F‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.
PAGE 179
‫ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3(TEST‬‬ ‫)‪5(ANOV‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ‪ ...............‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻭ ‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ ‪) ANOVA‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ............... A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ .....................‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(26‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .......... Save Res‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪* (22‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‪ .............
PAGE 180
‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ......... (A) 1‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ A‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، df‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، SS‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، SM‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، F‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .....(ERR) 2‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪، df‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،SS‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪.MS‬‬ ‫‪ ANOVA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ......... (A) 1‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ A‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،df‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،SS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،MS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،F‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ......... (B) 2‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ df B‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،SS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪،MS‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،F‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪p-‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ .......
PAGE 181
‫‪) ANOVA k‬ﺍﲡﺎﻫﲔ‬ ‫(‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )‪ (A‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ )‪ . (B‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﳑﺎﺛﻠﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪B2‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﳉﺔ ﺍﳊﺮﺍﺭﺓ( ‪B‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ‪A‬‬ ‫‪B1‬‬ ‫‪132‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪116 139‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪113‬‬ ‫‪A1‬‬ ‫‪122‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪131 126‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪133‬‬ ‫‪A2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﲢﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 182
‫‪ u‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬ ‫‪6-36‬‬
PAGE 183
‫‪ .6‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ( ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﹰ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺮﻯ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻮﺛﻮﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ 95%‬ﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 184
‫‪ k‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-1 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ Z‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪1(1-S‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ Z‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﲔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ Z‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪1(Z‬‬ ‫)‪4(2-P‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪-1 u‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﳌﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍ‪‬ﻬﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ‪.
PAGE 186
‫‪-2 u‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ‪ t‬ﲢﺴﺐ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻷﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﲔ ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪ t‬ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪.t‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪4(INTR‬‬ ‫)‪2(t‬‬ ‫)‪2(2-S‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﺷﻬﺮﺓ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ" ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻻﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 187
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪• 5(DIST)1(NORM) ... ( 6-41‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺎﻟﺐ‪) t-‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪2(t) ... (6-43‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪) χ2‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪3(CHI) ... (6-44‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪) F‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪4(F) ... (6-45‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪5(BINM) ... (6-46‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻥ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪6(g)1(POISN) ... (6-48‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪6(g)2(GEO) ... (6-49‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪6(g)3(H.GEO) ... (6-51‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ" ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ...
PAGE 188
‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ‪ σ = 1‬ﻭ ‪ μ = 0‬ﲢﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪x-‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)1(NORM)2(NCd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 189
‫‪f (x)dx = p‬‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫‪f (x)dx = p‬‬ ‫∞‪+‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫‪f (x)dx = p‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫∞‪−‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ‪ :‬ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻧﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪∞ = 1E99, –∞ = –1E99 :‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.
PAGE 190
‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪t-‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)2(t)3(InvN‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪ t-‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪df‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ( ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫ﲢﺴﺐ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ )‪ (p‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ x-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ )‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ χ2‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ χ2‬ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪) df‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ(ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)3(CHI)3(InvC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪.
PAGE 192
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪F‬‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)4(F)2(FCd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ F‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﲔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻰ ﻭ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ x-‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)4(F)3(InvF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ F‬ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺪ ﺍﻻﺩﻧﻲ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪ F‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ‪ d:df‬ﻭ ‪) n:df‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻂ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻢ( ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)5(BINM)2(BCd‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ)‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻼﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ` (‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪)xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭ `‪) xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ xInv‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ ‪ ،`xInv‬ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 195
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)1(POISN)3(InvP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪(x‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)2(GEO)2(GCd‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‪.
PAGE 197
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ) ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `( ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪)xInv‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ( ﻭ ‪`xInv‬‬ ‫)ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ `(‪ .‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ xInv‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ ‪ ، `xInv‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎ‪.
PAGE 198
‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‬ ‫)‪5(DIST)6(g)3(H.GEO)3(InvH‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﲡﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫)‪(x‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻗﻲ‪.
PAGE 199
‫ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ )‪-1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ...... (Z‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )”‪ “≠ p0‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﺍﺛﻨﲔ ‪،‬‬ ‫”‪ “< p0‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺩﻧﻲ‪ “> p0”،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫‪-2) p1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ........... (Z‬ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )”‪ “≠ p‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﺍﺛﻨﲔ‪،‬‬ ‫”‪ “< p2‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ – ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪“> p2” ، 2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ‪-‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫‪-1) μ‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ ...............
PAGE 200
‫‪X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ...............................‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –‪) x‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ (‬ ‫‪Y‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ...............................‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ –‪) y‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ........................... C-‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ )‪ ^ 0‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ–‪(1 > C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ...............................‬ﲡﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ) ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ(‬ ‫‪) x‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ( ‪ ..............................‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) σ‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ(‪ ..............................‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪(σ > 0‬‬ ‫‪) μ‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ(‪ ..............................
PAGE 201
‫ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬.
PAGE 202
‫‪ k‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬ ‫ﳝﲔ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺶ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ(‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫'‪o + Z (α /2) · σ/‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ‪n‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ‪(o1 – o2) + Z(α /2) σ12/n1 + σ22/n2‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= ))‪x/n + Z(α /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ= )‪(x1/n1 – x2/n2‬‬ ‫‪-2‬ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪Z‬‬ ‫‪+ Z(α /2) (x1/n1 · (1 – x1/n1))/n1 + (x2/n2 · (1 – x2/n2))/n2‬‬ ‫‪-1‬ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ‪t‬‬ ‫'‪o + tn−1(α /2) · sx/‬‬
PAGE 203
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫∞–‬ ‫∫‬ ‫∞‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫∫‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ = ﳝﲔ‬ ‫∫‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫ﺫﻳﻞ = ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪t-‬‬ ‫∞‬ ‫‪p(x)dx‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ‪F‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ :n‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ :μ‬ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ) ‪(μ > 0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫)··· ‪(x = 1, 2, 3,‬‬ ‫‪× N – MC n – x‬‬ ‫‪NC n‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫
PAGE 204
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(TVM‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪TVM‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ TVM‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 205
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪TVM‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ 6(GRPH‬ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !1(TRCE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ e‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ‪ SFV ,SI ,PV‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ d‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﳌﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻄﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 206
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }‪• {SI‬‬ ‫}ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ{ … }‪• {SFV‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{ … }‪• {REPT‬‬ ‫}ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{ … }‪• {GRPH‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !1(TRCE‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 207
‫‪I %u‬‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(‬ ‫‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ( ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻬﺞ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PV + α × PMT + β × FV = 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ I %‬ﻣﻦ ‪) i‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ(‬ ‫)‪i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1‬‬ ‫}‬ ‫)ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ( ‪–1 × C/Y × 100...‬‬ ‫‪P/Y‬‬ ‫‪C/Y‬‬ ‫) ‪(1+ i‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ ‪FV ...............‬‬ ‫{{‬ ‫= ‪I%‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ‪n...............‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪P/Y ..............‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ ‪I% ............‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪C/Y..........
PAGE 208
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ{ … }‪• {n‬‬ ‫}ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺔ{ … }‪• {I%‬‬ ‫} ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ( … }‪• {PV‬‬ ‫} ﺩﻓﻊ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﺪﺍﻉ ( … }‪• {PMT‬‬ ‫} ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ { ) ﻗﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺭﺻﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻉ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ( … }‪• {FV‬‬ ‫} ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻦ { … }‪• {AMT‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 209
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻻﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﺪﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﺻﻠﻴﺎ‪.
PAGE 210
‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪} … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ{‬ ‫}‪} … {GRPH‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ{‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !1(TRCE‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 211
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪b : PRNPM1 = PMT + BALPM1–1 × i‬‬ ‫‪c : BALPM2 = BALPM2–1 + PRNPM2‬‬ ‫‪PM2‬‬ ‫‪d : Σ PRN = PRNPM1 + PRNPM1+1 + … + PRNPM2‬‬ ‫‪PM1‬‬ ‫‪e : Σ INT = INTPM1 + INTPM1+1 + … + INTPM2‬‬ ‫‪PM2‬‬ ‫‪PM1‬‬ ‫) ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪BAL0 = PV (INT1 = 0 and PRN1 = PMT‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﲔ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ )ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ I%‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ)‘‪(I%‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻁ ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‬
PAGE 212
‫• }‪ } … { ΣINT‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{ PM2‬‬ ‫• } ‪ } … {ΣPRN‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺍﳌﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪ PM1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ ‪{ PM2‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {CMPD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ {‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {'EFF‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ {‬ ‫• }‪ } … {'APR‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻳﺔ {‬ ‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 214
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﲔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 2(DAYS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)‪6(g)2(DAYS‬‬ ‫‪ .......... d1‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ .......... d2‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ .......... D‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻻ ‪ d1‬ﺍﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 215
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﺿﻪ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ) ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﻱ ﺳﻨﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻂ – ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ )‪ ، (SL‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪ ، (FP‬ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ– ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ – ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﺍﺕ )‪ ، (SYD‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ – ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ )‪. (DB‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﳌﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﳌﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪.
PAGE 216
‫‪ u‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﳌﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ‬ ‫)‪(DB‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺔ ‪j‬‬ ‫‪DBj‬‬ ‫‪ : RDVj‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ‪j‬‬ ‫‪ : I%‬ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬ ‫‪I%‬‬ ‫‪Y–1‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪100n‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫× ‪DB1 = PV‬‬ ‫‪RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1‬‬ ‫‪I%‬‬ ‫‪100n‬‬ ‫× ) ‪DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV‬‬ ‫‪RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj‬‬ ‫)‪({Y–1}≠12‬‬ ‫‪DBn +1 = RDVn‬‬ ‫)‪({Y–1}≠12‬‬ ‫‪RDVn+1 = 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(DEPR‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ ‪.
PAGE 217
‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ )‪ (Ma ERROR‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﲔ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ } … {REPT‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ {‬ ‫• }‪ } … {TABL‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ {‬ ‫• }‪ } … {GRPH‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ {‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺳﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫"ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" "ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ‪ .
PAGE 218
‫• ﻻﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪CPN‬‬ ‫‪CPN‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫) ‪(k–1+B/D‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪RDV‬‬ ‫‪–Σ‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪YLD/100‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫‪k=1‬‬ ‫‪(1+‬‬ ‫) ‪(N–1+B/D‬‬ ‫‪CST = PRC + INT‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪YLD/100‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫– = ‪PRC‬‬ ‫‪(1+‬‬ ‫‪CPN‬‬ ‫‪M‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫– = ‪INT‬‬ ‫)‪(YLD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 4(BOND‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪6(g)4(BOND‬‬ ‫‪ ..........
PAGE 219
‫‪ MEMO‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪MEMO‬‬ ‫• ﹼ‬ ‫‪ ....PRD‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ d1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪d2‬‬ ‫‪ ......... N‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺤﻘﺎﻕ‬ ‫‪ ......... A‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪ ......... B‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(-D-A‬‬ ‫‪ ........ D‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ MEMO‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻴﻤﺔ )‪ (CPD‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻼ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ‪ .
PAGE 220
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PRGM‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﺑﺠﺪﻱ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﹼ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪, spaces, [, ],‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 221
‫‪ww‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 10‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 10‬‬ ‫‪baw‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪ww‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 15‬‬ ‫‪ V‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪A = 15‬‬ ‫‪bfw‬‬ ‫‪w*1‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺍﻭ ‪ (RUN‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪>" w‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ<" ‪.Prog‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ \ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 222
‫• }‪} ... {I/O‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ‪ /‬ﲢﻜﻢ ‪{I/O‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {:‬ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪ -‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ{‬ ‫• }‪ } ... {STR‬ﺍﻣﺮ ﺧﻴﻄﻲ{‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 8-7‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ !m(SET UP‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.
PAGE 223
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻌﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻘﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺷﺊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ "ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (α- 1‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.
PAGE 224
‫‪ .4‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(SRC‬ﺍﻭ ‪ w‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪*2.‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ" ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲢﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ *2‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻘﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﳋﻂ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ )_( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )^( ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 225
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ A‬ﳌﺴﺢ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 4(DEL‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(YES‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ )‪ 6(NO‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 5(DEL • A‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 226
‫‪ .5‬ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ ‫‪١٠-٨ ....................................................Break‬‬ ‫‪١٧-٨ ................................ CloseComport38k‬‬ ‫‪١٣-٨ ............................................. ClrGraph‬‬ ‫‪١٤-٨ .................................................. ClrList‬‬ ‫‪١٤-٨ .................................................. ClrMat‬‬ ‫‪١٤-٨ ................................................. ClrText‬‬ ‫‪١٤-٨ .................................................. ClrVct‬‬ ‫‪١٤-٨ .........
PAGE 227
‫‪ k‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫? )ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﲟﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ? ”>ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ<“ ‪>,‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< → ?‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪? → A_ :‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻄﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﻭﻳﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﲢﺪﺩ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ "?" ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳ ﹼﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "?>ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ<" ﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﺺ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 255‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪.
PAGE 228
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)‪(COM‬‬ ‫‪If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ‪ If-‬ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )‪ .(0‬ﻭﺗﻨﻔﹼ ﺬ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪ IfEnd -‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ ‪ Then -‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻥ ‪Else-‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫_‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪If‬‬ ‫>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ< ‪Then‬‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫^‬ ‫^‬ ‫‪ Then -‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ If-‬ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪ .
PAGE 229
‫‪Do~LpWhile‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫>ﺣﺎﻟﺔ<‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪LpWhile‬‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫‪Do‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ )‪،(0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻥ ‪.LpWhile-‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ‪ ، LpWhile-‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ )ﺍﳌﻔﺤﻮﺻﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 230
‫‪Prog‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(RUN‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪”_ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ“ ‪Prog‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪Prog "ABC"_ :‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺴﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺗﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.
PAGE 231
‫‪ k‬ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ‬ ‫)‪(JUMP‬‬ ‫‪Dsz‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻫﻮ ﲡﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ‪، 1‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫_‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫‪ ≠ 0‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫>ﺑﻴﺎﻥ<‬ ‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ< ‪Dsz‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ = ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪A :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪θ r ,Z‬‬ ‫]ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ[ ‪ : Dsz B‬ﻳﻨﻘﺺ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ B‬ﺑـ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑـ ‪ ،1‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺨﺘﺒﺮﻫﺎ ) ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ(‪ .
PAGE 232
‫⇒ )ﺭﻣﺰﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﳌﺸﺮﻭﻁ‪ . .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 233
‫‪ClrList‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ< ‪ClrList‬‬ ‫‪ClrList‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1 :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪Ans ، 26‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑـ"ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺷﻴﺊ ﻟـ "ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪(fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫‪ClrMat‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 234
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ FTG-Con‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﻢ ‪ FTG-Plt‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪DrawGraph‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 235
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫‪PlotPhase‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ x-‬ﻭﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪.y-‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻮﺭ‪>,
PAGE 236
‫‪Locate‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 237
‫‪Receive38k / Send38k‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 38‬ﻛﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ< ‪Send38k‬‬ ‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ<‬ ‫>ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ<‬ ‫‪Receive38k‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ OpenComport38k‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ CloseComport38k‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﰎ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻉ ‪،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 238
‫(‪Exp‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>"[)] :‬ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(‪Exp‬‬ ‫(‪Exp'Str‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>[)] :‬ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ< ‪>,‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(‪Exp'Str‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )‪(Yn, r, Xt, Yt, X‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﺎﺩﺓ )‪ ،(an, an+1, an+2, bn, bn+1, bn+2, cn, cn+1, cn+2‬ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪(fn‬‬ ‫ﻛﺤﺠﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ )>ﺻﻴﻐﺔ<(‪.
PAGE 239
‫(‪StrMid‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ ‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻝ‪ m‬ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪(0 < n < 9999, n‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>", n[,m)] :‬ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(‪StrMid‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ "‪ "m‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ‪ n‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬ ‫(‪StrRight‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺴﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ ‪ n‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﳝﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻫﻮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪(0 < n < 9999, n‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪>",n[)] :‬ﺳﻠﺴﺔ<"(‪StrRight‬‬ ‫(‪StrRotate‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﳉﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﳝﻦ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻝ‪.
PAGE 240
‫‪ k‬ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫‪RclCapt‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ‪ 1 :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(20‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪> :‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ< ‪RclCapt‬‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﻧﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺭﻓﺎﻗﻪ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﲔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪.
PAGE 241
‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬ ‫)‪(`Row‬‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ‪.4‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺮﻭﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫_‪`Row 4, A, 2‬‬ ‫‪Mat A‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪(`Row+‬‬ ‫ﳊﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻱ ‪ ، 4‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺻﻒ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.
PAGE 242
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫_‪DrawGraph‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪ Y1‬ﻣﻊ )ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻛـ ( ‪ J4(GRPH)1(Y)b‬ﺳﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪) ERROR‬ﺧﻄﺄ( ﺍﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ ”‪ “Y‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫• ‪V-Window‬‬ ‫‪View Window , , , , , ,‬‬ ‫>‪, , ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻝ ‪ ............. StoV-Win ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻝ ‪ ............. RclV-Win ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪>,
PAGE 243
‫• ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫_ ‪1 → D Start‬‬ ‫_ ‪5 → D End‬‬ ‫_ ‪1 → D pitch‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ & ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ & ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ & ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 244
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫)‪SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺯﺓ )ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ(‬ ‫‪3 432‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.
PAGE 245
‫• ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫_ ‪S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List 1, List 2, List 3‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﻼﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ "ﺧﻄﻲ" ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳌﻄﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻮﻏﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ‪Log ......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺧﻄﻲ ‪Linear .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﹼﺳﻲ ‪ExpReg(a.eˆbx) ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪Med-Med ...............‬‬ ‫)‪ExpReg(a.bˆx‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﺮﺑﻴﻌﻲ ‪Quad .....................
PAGE 246
‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ DrawDistNorm‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ ZLow < x < ZUp‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،p‬ﻭ ‪ ،ZLow‬ﻭ ‪ ZUp‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،p‬ﻭ ‪ ،ZLow‬ﻭ ‪ ،ZUp‬ﻭ ‪ p‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻴﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 247
‫‪1 4154‬‬ ‫‪ndf + ddf‬‬ ‫‪dx‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪ndf × x‬‬ ‫‪× 1+‬‬ ‫‪ddf‬‬ ‫‪–1‬‬ ‫‪ndf‬‬ ‫‪ndf‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪× x‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ndf + ddf‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ndf‬‬ ‫×‬ ‫‪ndf × ddf‬‬ ‫‪ddf‬‬ ‫‪Γ‬‬ ‫‪Γ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Γ‬‬ ‫‪Upper‬‬ ‫‪Lower‬‬ ‫∫‬ ‫=‪p‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ DrawDistF‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ Lower < x < Upper‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 248
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳉﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫‪SinReg List1, List2‬‬ ‫‪-y‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪(YList‬‬ ‫‪-x‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪(XList‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪LogisticReg List1, List2‬‬ ‫‪-y‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪(YList‬‬ ‫‪-x‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ )‪(XList‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺣﺬﻓﺖ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﻨﻄﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺱ )] [(‪.
PAGE 249
‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪t-‬‬ ‫(‪ :tPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ ‪) t -‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ( p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪tPD(x, df [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻝ ‪ .x‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪Ans‬‬ ‫)‪ ListAns‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ x‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :)tCD :tCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪) t-‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪tCD(Lower,Upper,df [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ،p‬ﻭ‪،tLow‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ tUp‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،p‬ﻭ ‪ ،tLow‬ﻭ‪ .
PAGE 250
‫(‪ :InvFCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ‪) F‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪InvFCD(p,ndf,ddf [)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻝ ‪ . p‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ xInv‬ﻭ ‪Ans‬‬ ‫)‪ ListAns‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ p‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫(‪ :BinomialPD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪BinomialPD([x,]n,P[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻝ ‪ . x‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪Ans‬‬ ‫)‪ ListAns‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ x‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.
PAGE 251
‫(‪ :GeoCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ (p‬ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪GeoCD(X,P[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻝ ‪ .X‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ p‬ﻭ ‪Ans‬‬ ‫)‪ ListAns‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ X‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫(‪ :InvGeoCD‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪InvGeoCD(p,P[)] :‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻝ ‪ . p‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ X‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪xInv‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ ListAns) Ans‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ p‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‪.
PAGE 252
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫]‪OneSampleZTest "μ condition", μ0, σ, List[, Freq‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ‪ Z, p, o, sx, n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ z, p, o, sx, n‬ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ListAns 1‬ﻟﻰ ‪.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ :Z‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ‪ 2 -‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.Z -‬‬ ‫‪TwoSampleZTest "μ1 condition", σ1, σ2, o1, n1, o2, n2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ‪ Z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ z, p, o1, o2, n1, n2‬ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ListAns‬ﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 253
‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪χ2‬‬ ‫‪:ChiGOFTest‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ‪ chi-square goodness‬ﻟﻺﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2,df, List 3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺻﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.(CNTRB‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ‪ χ , p, df‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ ListAns 1‬ﻟﻰ ‪.3‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ CNTRB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 254
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 365 .......DateMode365‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ 360 .......DateMode360‬ﻳﻮﻣﺎ‬ ‫• ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫‪ .................PmtBgn‬ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .................PmtEnd‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ...... PeriodsAnnual‬ﺳﻨﻮﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ .........
PAGE 255
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪Cmpd_PMT(n, I%, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y‬‬ ‫‪:Cmpd_FV‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍ‪‬ﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪Cmpd_FV(n, I%, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ )ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺜﻤﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬ ‫‪:Cash_NPV‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Cash_IRR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Cash_PBP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪:Cash_NFV‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪Cash_NPV(I%, Csh‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪Cash_IRR(Csh‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪Cash_PBP(I%, Csh‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 256
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬/‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬ .‫ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬d2 ‫ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻰ‬d1 ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬ :Days_Prd Days_Prd(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2) :‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ‬ .‫ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬:Bond_PRC Bond_PRC(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, YLD) = {PRC, INT, CST} :‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ .‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ‬ Bond_YLD(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, PRC) :Bond_YLD :‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ .‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﺔ‬.7 .
PAGE 257
[m/s] [km/h] [knot] [ft/s] [mile/h] [u] [mg] [g] [kg] [mton] [oz] [lb] [slug] [ton(short)] [ton(long)] [N] [lbf] [tonf] [dyne] [kgf] [Pa] [kPa] [mmH2O] [mmHg] [atm] [inH2O] [inHg] [lbf/in²] [bar] [kgf/cm²] [eV] [J] [calth] [cal15] [calIT] [kcalth] [kcal15] [kcalIT] [I-atm] [kW•h] [ft•lbf] [Btu] [erg] [kgf•m] [W] [calth/s] [hp] [ft•lbf/s] [Btu/min] sinh_ cosh_ tanh_ sinh–1_ cosh–1_ tanh–1_ ! P C Ran#_ RanInt#( RanNorm#( m/s km/h knot ft/s mile/h u mg g kg mton oz lb slug ton(short) ton(long) N lbf tonf dyne
PAGE 258
H_Start H_pitch x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 n x sx n1 n2 x1 x2 sx1 sx2 sp *7 Y r Xt Yt X D_Start D_End D_pitch F_Start F_End F_pitch F_Result an an+1 an+2 bn bn+1 bn+2 cn cn+1 cn+2 R_Start R_End a0 a1 a2 b0 b1 b2 c0 c1 c2 anStart bnStart cnStart R_Result Sim_Result Sim_Coef Ply_Result Ply_Coef n I% Strt Pitch x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 n x sx n1 n2 x1 x2 sx1 sx2 sp an an+1 an+2 bn bn+1 bn+2 cn cn+1 cn+2 Strt End a0 a1 a2 b0 b1 b2 c0 c1 c2 anSt bnSt cnSt Sell( Margin( Days_Prd( Bond_PRC( Bond_YLD( PTS Sell Mrg PRD PRC YLD
PAGE 259
VarRange VarList_ Rang List On T-VAR ΣDSP Off None RESID List Real CPLX a+bi ΣdispOn ΣdispOff Resid-None Resid-List_ Real a+bi r∠θ d/c ab/c Y=DrawSpeedNorm Y=DrawSpeedHigh DateMode365 DateMode360 PmtBgn PmtEnd PeriodsAnnual PeriodsSemi IneqTypeAnd IneqTypeOr SimplfyAuto SimplfyMan Q1Q3TypeStd Q1Q3TypeOnData r∠θ d/c ab/c Norm High 365 360 Bgn End Annu Semi And Or Auto Man Std OnD FRAC Y•SPD DATE PMT PRD INEQ Send( Receive( Send38k_ Receive38k_ OpenComport38k CloseComport38k : StrJoin( StrLen( StrCmp(
PAGE 260
se r r2 pa Fa Adf SSa MSa pb Fb Bdf SSb MSb pab Fab ABdf SSab MSab Edf SSe MSe Left Right p̂ p̂ 1 p̂ 2 df p xInv x1Inv x2Inv zLow zUp tLow tUp se r r2 pa Fa Adf SSa MSa pb Fb Bdf SSb MSb pab Fab ABdf SSab MSab Edf SSe MSe Left Right p̂ p̂ 1 p̂ 2 df p xInv x1Inv x2Inv zLow zUp tLow tUp ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ‬ INTR DIST 3 ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬2 ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻱ‬ Exp(ae^bx) ae^bx ab^x Exp(ab^x) Square × Cross k Dot Leng StickLength Hztl StickHoriz % % Data Data None ax+b LinearReg(ax+b) a+bx LinearReg(a+bx) ExpReg(a•e^bx) ae^bx ab^x ExpReg(a•
PAGE 261
‫‪ .8‬ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﳌﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﲟﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ‪ ،A‬ﻭﻳﹸﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﺑـ )‪ B (2, 3, 5, 7....‬ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺑﲔ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ( ﻟـ ‪. X‬‬ ‫‪ :Y1‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫‪ :Y2‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺺ‬ ‫‪ :Y3‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ :Y4‬ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺑﺆﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﶈﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ :Y5‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻝ ‪ Y3‬ﻭ ‪Y4‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ‪ Y1‬ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 263
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﳝﻨﺤﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺬ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﲡﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S • SHT‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻭ ‪ fx-9750GII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.S • SHT‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ S • SHT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬ﻭ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S • SHT‬ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻰ ﺏ ”‪.“SHEET‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ )ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﳑﻄﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪.
PAGE 264
‫• }‪ ... {DEL‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪) DEL‬ﺣﺬﻑ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪{ROW}/{COL}/{ALL‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {INS‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪) INS‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪{ROW}/{COL‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CLR‬ﲤﺴﺢ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {GRPH‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪ GRPH‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(STAT‬‬ ‫• }‪{GPH1}/{GPH2}/{GPH3}/{SEL}/{SET‬‬ ‫• }‪ ... {CALC‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟـ ‪) CALC‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ(ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(STAT‬‬ ‫• }‪{1VAR}/{2VAR}/{REG}/{SET‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 265
‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 2(FILE)1(OPEN‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪f‬ﻭ‪ c‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،S • SHT‬ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﻟﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(FILE)3(SV • AS‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻹﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳉﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 266
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﳌﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﲟﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 267
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ JUMP‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ)‪2(EDIT)4(JUMP)1(GO‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ A1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (Z999‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 268
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.2(EDIT)3(CELL‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﲔ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ e‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﳌﻀﻲ ﻗﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .
PAGE 269
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Expr‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ f(x‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪a+(X)x+bw (X2 + 1) :‬‬ ‫‪Var‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻝ ‪.Expr‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪a+(X)w (X) :‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )‪ (X1‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻻﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ‪.Var‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪cw :‬‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ )‪ (Xn‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻻﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﻳﻼ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﺑـ‪.Var‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ‪baw :‬‬ ‫‪Incre‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ )‪ (m‬ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ، X1‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪، (X2 = X1 + m):‬‬ ‫)‪ ، (X3 = X2 + m‬ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﺔ‪ .
PAGE 270
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻮﻧﺎ ﻧﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫>‪ . × = ‪‪
PAGE 271
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ B1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪!.(=)av(A)b+fw‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪GRAB‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ B1‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪!.(=)1(GRAB)d1(SET)+fw‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ )→‪ 5(BOT‬ﺍﻟﻰ )‪ 1(GO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(GRAB‬ﻣﻌﺮﹼﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ )→‪ 6(BOT‬ﺍﻟﻰ )‪ 2(GO‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ‪ .JUMP‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫" ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ‪ JUMP‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 272
‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻟﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (9-4‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 2(EDIT)2(COPY‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﹼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺼﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ )‪.
PAGE 273
‫ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ B1:C1‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ =‪ B1+5‬ﻭ ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ .B2:C2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ C2‬ﺍﻟﻰ =‪ B2+5‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻘﺺ ﻭﻟﺼﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ )ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (9-4‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.
PAGE 274
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .B1:B3‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(9-5‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪. 2(EDIT)6(g)1(FILL‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻞﺀ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ "ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ" ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ‪ . =A1×2 (!.(=)av(A)b*cw‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﲢﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ "ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 275
‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻒ )ﺍﻟﺼﻔﻮﻑ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ )ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ، 4‬ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪، A2:B4‬ﻭ ‪ ،C2:C4‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﻁ ﳊﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ ، B‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪، A1:B1‬ﻭ ‪ ، A2:B4‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.3(DEL‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻴﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 276
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S • SHT‬ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S • SHT‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ‪ ,)CellSum‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ,(CellIf‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S • SHT‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ "ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ" ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 277
‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪5(CEL)6(Prod) :‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪[)] :‬ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ(‪CellProd‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪=CellProd(B3:B5) :‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪B3:B5‬‬ ‫(‪CellProd‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ(‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪S • SHT‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S • SHT‬ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ‪ )CellSum‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ C1‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍ‪‬ﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪ .A1:B5‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪.A1:B5‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 278
‫‪ k‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪(GRPH‬‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ(‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (x-‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ‪(y-‬‬ ‫‪–2.1, 0.3, 1.5، 2.0, 2.4‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﻌﺜﺮ(‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ x-‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪ ،A‬ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻮﺭ ‪ y-‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ‪.B‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ )‪.(A1:B5‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 279
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻤﺪﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ X‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪Y ,‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ‪X‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪Y ,‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ‪ . ,‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪X‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•ﻭ ﹼ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪StatGraph1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﺳﻢ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ .
PAGE 280
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﳌﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ x-‬ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ‪ A1:A5‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪y-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ‪ ،B1:B5‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )‪.(A1:B5‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(g)2(CALC‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ، CALC‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪.2(2VAR‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪. 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ d‬ﻭ ‪ e‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪ .‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 281
‫• ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪1Var XCell‬‬ ‫‪1Var Freq‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2Var XCell‬‬ ‫‪2Var YCell‬‬ ‫‪2Var Freq‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ x‬ﻭﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪ y‬ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﳌﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 282
‫‪ .5‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪S • SHT‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ )ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ( ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫)‪ Z, r, θ‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪(A‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﲔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 283
‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪.A1:A10‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)3(STO)2(LIST‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ" ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻼﻳﺎ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪."[1-26‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (26‬ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 284
‫‪ u‬ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(g)4(RCL)3(MAT‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ "ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻰ" ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ )‪ A‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ (Z‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(EXE‬ﺍﻭ ‪ w‬ﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 285
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .eActivity‬ﻭ ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ( ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫"ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﹼﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﺘﻮﺯﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻼﺏ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻄﻼﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﺳﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭ ﺣﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.
PAGE 286
‫ﻳ ﹼﺒﲔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.eActivity‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ .........................‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ ........‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،RUN • MAT‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﲤﻜﲔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ‪ .......................
PAGE 287
‫• }‪ ...{INS‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪،‬ﻭ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﺍﻭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...{TEXT‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫• }‪ ...{CALC‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫• }‪ ...{STOP‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫• }‪ ...{'MAT‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪/(10-7‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10-7‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...{'LIST‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(10-7‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫• }‪ ...{TEXT‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪ ...
PAGE 288
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(OPEN‬ﺍﻭ *‪. w‬‬ ‫* ﺍﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻈﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺳﻮﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.3(DEL‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ " ﺣﺬﻑ ‪eActivity‬؟"‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ)‪.4(SRC‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 289
‫‪ k‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﳊﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ “TEXT‬ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.F3‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻰ ﲤﻜﲔ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ”‪“TEXT‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪ “CALC‬ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ F3‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 3(CALC‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‪.
PAGE 290
‫‪ k‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ‪ eActivity‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) RUN • MAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(1-3‬ﻭﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 291
‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ }‪ {'MAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .RUN • MAT‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(2-36‬ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ e • ACT‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ RUN • MAT‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﲔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 292
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﲤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﲔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ .eActivity‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﲟﺠﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﳌﻨﺘﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ" ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.
PAGE 293
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳌﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪2(STRP‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10-8‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ”‪) “Graph‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(GRAPH‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 294
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪.6(DRAW‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ،eActivity‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ) (‪. !a‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 8‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﲢﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .11‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻳﻀﺎﹰ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.
PAGE 295
‫‪ u‬ﻻﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.w‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﳌﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻭ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺪﻝ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍ‪‬ﺮﻭﻃﻲ‪.
PAGE 296
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ( ﳊﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻹﳊﺎﻕ ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ”‪ “g2e‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﰎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻪ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ))‪(1(FILE)2(SV-AS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﳊﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ”‪) “g1e‬ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﳝﺔ( ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﲢﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳌﻠﺤﻖ ”‪ “g2e‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﳌﻠﻒ ‪ eActivity‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﳌﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ) ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ OS 2.
PAGE 297
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪1(FILE)4(CAPA‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 298
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 299
‫‪ k‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻨﺬ ﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﺍﻭ‬ ‫‪ fx-9750GII‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ MEMORY‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.
PAGE 300
‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 301
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪*1SD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﶈﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ‪ g2m.‬ﺃﻭ ‪*g1m.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺬﻛﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﰎ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪eActivity‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ eActivity‬ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ )ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍ‪‬ﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﳌﺮﺑﻌﺔ )] [(‪.
PAGE 302
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻄﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ A :‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ، Z‬ﻭ {‪ 0 ,~ ,‘ ,} ,‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪، 9‬ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ " ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ"‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ" ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺩﺧﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﳌﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. J‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 303
‫‪ k‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﺍﻭ ‪ fx-9750GII‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍ‪‬ﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﲔ ﺍﺳﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.2(COPY‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ /‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪) SD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪*1.(fx-9860GII SD‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 304
‫‪ k‬ﲢﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﲢﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ،1‬ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﳌﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ " ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ" ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 305
‫‪ k‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11-2‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.6(DEL‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﳊﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11-2‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ )ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 306
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ "‪ "R‬ﻣﻈﻠﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﳌﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﻑ "‪"S‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ " ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.11-2‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪3(SRC‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﳊﺮﻑ "‪ "S‬ﻟﻜﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﳊﺮﻑ "‪ "S‬ﻣﻈﻠﻼ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 307
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪1(SAVE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﳊﻔﻆ‬ ‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.(fx-9860GII SD‬‬ ‫• ‪ ... b‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫• ‪ ... c‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ b‬ﺍﻭ‪) c‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.(fx-9860GII SD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ f‬ﻭ ‪ c‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ w‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﻤﻰ ﺑـ ‪.BACKUP.g2m‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﰎ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 308
‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍ‪‬ﻠﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪. *1w‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ" ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺳﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﳌﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭ )‪ 6(No‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ " ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﳑﺘﻠﺌﺔ" ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.
PAGE 309
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫(‪} ... 1‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ{‬ ‫•)‬ ‫(‪} ... 2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺁﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ{‬ ‫•)‬ ‫• )‪} ... 3(LANG‬ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 4(VER‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ{‬ ‫• )‪} ... 5(RSET‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ{‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬ ‫(‪ 1‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.
PAGE 310
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍ‪‬ﻫﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‬ ‫(‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪} ... 1(LIGHT‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪{!K(LIGHT) :‬‬ ‫• )‪} ... 2(ANY‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﺍﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ{‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﺍﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍ‪‬ﻫﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﳋﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 311
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 6(MSG‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﺍﻭ )‪ !J(QUIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪)VER‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﳌﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ 4(VER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳌﺆﺷﺮ ‪ c‬ﻭ ‪ f‬ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﳌﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﳉﻤﻴﻊ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .
PAGE 312
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 6(g‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪} ... 1(M&S‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ{*‬ ‫• )‪} ... 2(ALL‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ{*‬ ‫• )‪} ... 3(SD‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) {SD‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫‪(fx-9860GII SD‬‬ ‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GII/fx-9750GII‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 313
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﲢﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﲔ ﺁﻟﺘﲔ ﺣﺎﺳﺒﺘﲔ ‪CASIO Power Graphic‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺘﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ *SB-62‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎ ﹰ ﺑﺎﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.SB-62‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.SB-62‬‬ ‫• ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 314
‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .LINK‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {TRAN‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {RECV‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ {‬ ‫• }‪} ... {EXAM‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {CABL‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ{‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫• }‪} ... {WAKE‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {CAPT‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ{‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 315
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﳌﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳉﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﳋﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ، 4‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(13-11‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﲔ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪2(RECV‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﳊﲔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 316
‫‪ u‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ )‪ . 6(TRAN‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• )‪ ... 1(Yes‬ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• )‪ ... 6(No‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ 1(Yes‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 317
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)‪5(WAKE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫• }‪} ... {On‬ﺗﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ{‬ ‫• }‪} ... {Off‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ{‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪. 1(On‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 318
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫>‪‪*5‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺴﻞ‪*5‬‬ ‫‪TABLE‬‬ ‫>‪
PAGE 319
‫‪ k‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﺧﺮ ﻟﻶﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ "OS 2.0‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ‪fx-9860G II SD, fx-9860G II , fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750G II , fx-7400G II‬‬ ‫• ‪ ، fx-9860G SD‬ﻭ ‪ fx-9860G ,‬ﻭ ‪ fx-9860G AU‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﰎ ﲢﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ‪.2.0‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ OS 2.0‬ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ ،OS 2.0‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-9860G ,‬ﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪ ، fx-7400G‬ﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.
PAGE 320
‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﶈﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ) ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ "ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ"(‬‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪e • ACT *1‬‬‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪S • SHT *1‬‬‫‪ *1‬ﳝﻜﻦ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9860G SD‬‬ ‫)‪ fx-9860G AU (OS 2.0‬ﻭ )‪(OS 2.0), fx-9860G (OS 2.0‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﶈﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )@( ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻱ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﹼ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪ fx-7400GII‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺧﻄﺄ‪.
PAGE 321
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‪*1‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬‫ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬‫‪ -‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬ ‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6‬‬‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪*26‬‬‫ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪F-Mem6*2‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪G-Mem6*2‬‬ ‫‪ *1‬
PAGE 322
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ OS 2.0‬ﺍﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺴﺔ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪.
PAGE 323
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﲢﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ /‬ﺍ‪‬ﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍ‪‬ﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻄﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪*1‬‬‫ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﳌﻌﺎﺩﻟﺔ‬‫ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪*1‬‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪.fx-7400G‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪ fx-9860G‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﳕﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪fx-9860G‬‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪OS 2.
PAGE 324
‫• )‪} ... 4(Recv‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) fx-9860GII Manager PLUS‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ({‬ ‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ‪.fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ‪(fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﹰ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 325
‫‪ k‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪OHP‬‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ‪(fx-7400GII‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ OHP‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.OHP‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ”ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‪3(Projector) .‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪.OHP‬‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﳋﻄﻮﺓ ‪.3‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 326
‫‪ u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪.( YP-100‬‬ ‫• ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴ ﹼﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ” ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ“‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪3(Projector‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻂ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳌﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺍﻭ ‪.
PAGE 327
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) SDHC‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪(fx-9860GII SD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ .*SDHC‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ “SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪.SDHC‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﳋﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB 2‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ .
PAGE 328
‫‪ u‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﲡﺎﻩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪Back‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪Front‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺑ ﹰﺪﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﳌﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻻﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CASIO‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.
PAGE 329
‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﲢﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (12-3‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﳝﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺬ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﰎ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‪ .
PAGE 330
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﻃﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪Syntax‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫‪Ma ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ J‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﳋﻄﺄ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﳌﺴﻤﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Go ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻲ ) ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻔﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪(.
PAGE 331
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪Argument‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﲢﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺮ ﺍﳌﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﳊﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Dimension‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ • ،‬ﲢﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﳌﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺘﺠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫‪Range‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Condition‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ 1 .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.
PAGE 332
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫!‪Can’t Solve‬‬ ‫‪Adjust initial‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﳊﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﶈﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪value or‬‬ ‫‪bounds. Then‬‬ ‫‪try again.‬‬ ‫‪No Variable‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Conversion‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 333
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪Time Out‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﳊﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Circular‬‬ ‫‪ERROR‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻱ )ﻧﺤﻮ "=‪ "A1‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ (A1‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﳉﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﳊﻠﻮﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﳌﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳊﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﲟﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ tol‬ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﳋﻠﻴﺔ ﳊﺬﻑ ﺍﳌﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 334
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﳌﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪sinx‬‬ ‫‪cosx‬‬ ‫‪tanx‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫‪(DEG) |x| < 9 × (109)°‬‬ ‫‪(RAD) |x| < 5 × 107πrad‬‬ ‫‪(GRA) |x| < 1 × 1010grad‬‬ ‫‪sin–1x‬‬ ‫‪cos–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1‬‬ ‫‪tan–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪sinhx‬‬ ‫‪coshx‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 230.9516564‬‬ ‫‪tanhx‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 ×10100‬‬ ‫‪sinh–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪cosh–1x‬‬ ‫‪1 < x < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪tanh–1x‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫‪logx‬‬ ‫‪Inx‬‬ ‫‪10x‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10100 < x < 100‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10100‬‬ ‫‪< x < 230.
PAGE 335
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﳊﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳊﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪|a|, b, c < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫”’ ‪°‬‬ ‫‪0 < b, c‬‬ ‫⎯←‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 10100‬‬ ‫”’ ‪°‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪|x| < 1 × 107‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪±1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ‪*.‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪x > 0:‬‬ ‫‪< ylogx < 100‬‬ ‫)‪^(xy‬‬ ‫‪–1 × 10‬‬ ‫‪100‬‬ ‫‪x=0:y>0‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫–––– ‪x < 0 : y = n,‬‬ ‫‪2n+1‬‬ ‫"‬ ‫"‬ ‫)ﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ‪(m, n‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻦ ؛‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪–1 × 10100 < y log |x| < 100‬‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﳌﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻛﺤﺠﺞ‪.
PAGE 336
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )‪fx-9860GII SD/fx-9860GII/‬‬ ‫‪ fx-9860G AU PLUS‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ )‪ (Examination Modes‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﳊﺪﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ؛ ﳑﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﳋﻀﻮﻉ ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﳕﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪fx-9860GII ،fx-9860GII SD‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﻨﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪ IB‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪.NL‬‬ ‫‪fx-9860G AU PLUS‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪.IB‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.
PAGE 337
‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﳋﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﳑﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪:IB‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﲔ )‪ c(E‬ﻭ )‪ ،h(M‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .o‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "‪Enter Examination Mode‬‬ ‫?‪."for IB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪:NL‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺣﲔ )‪ i(N‬ﻭ )‪ ،a(L‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪ .o‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "‪Enter Examination Mode‬‬ ‫?‪."for NL‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.1(Yes‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 338
‫‪ u‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺤﲔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪IB‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ‪NL‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫• ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ) ﺃﻭ ( ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﳊﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ 60‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ a-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .
PAGE 339
‫‪ u‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (1‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ "‪) "Select Connection Mode‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﳌﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﳊﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.FA-124‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﳊﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﳌﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 340
‫‪ u‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﳝﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.LINK‬‬ ‫)‪ ... 3(EXAM)2(ENTR‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ... 3(EXAM)3(APP‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﳌﻌﻄﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ... 3(EXAM)4(EXIT‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 341
E-CON2 Application (English) (fx-9750GII)
PAGE 342
Contents • All of the explanations provided here assume that you are already familiar with the operating precautions, terminology, and operational procedures of the calculator and the EA-200. • Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all page references in this “E-CON2 Application” chapter are to pages in this chapter.
PAGE 343
1-1 E-CON2 Overview 1 E-CON2 Overview • From the Main Menu, select E-CON2 to enter the E-CON2 Mode. E-CON2 Main Menu • The “E-CON2 Mode” provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data sampling using the CASIO EA-200. • 1(SET) ........ Displays a screen for setting up the EA-200. • 2(MEM) ....... Displays a screen for saving EA-200 setup data under a file name. • 3(PROG) ..... Performs program conversion.
PAGE 344
2-1 Using the Setup Wizard 2 Using the Setup Wizard This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the EA-200 setup quickly and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear. If you need more control over specific sampling parameters, you should consider using the Advanced Setup procedure on page 3-1. k Setup Wizard Parameters Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three EA-200 basic sampling parameters using an interactive wizard format.
PAGE 345
2-2 Using the Setup Wizard u To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard Before getting started... • Before starting the procedure below, make sure you first decide if you want to start sampling immediately using the setup you configure with Setup Wizard, or if you want to store the setup for later sampling. • See sections 6-1, 7-1, and 8-1 of this chapter (E-CON2 Application) for information about procedures required to start sampling and to store a setup.
PAGE 346
2-3 Using the Setup Wizard • If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, skip to step 6. 5. Select the options for the sensor you specified in step 4. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the option you want to select, and then press w. • If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, advance to step 6.
PAGE 347
2-4 Using the Setup Wizard 7. After inputting total sampling time value you want, press w. This displays the “Select Unit” screen. 8. Use number keys b through e to specify the unit for the value you specified in step 6. • This displays a confirmation screen like the one shown below. 9. If there is not problem with the contents of the confirmation screen, press 1. If you need to change the setup, press 6 or J.
PAGE 348
2-5 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency Characteristics) Data Sampling When you perform sound sampling executed the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by specifying [CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three options: [Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical axis).
PAGE 349
2-6 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a Photogate Setup Connection of a Vernier Photogate requires configuration of setup parameters that are slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors. u To configure a setup for Photogate alone 1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2. 2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
PAGE 350
2-7 Using the Setup Wizard 4. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select a Gate Status setting. • Selecting a gate status causes a screen for specifying the number of samples to appear. 5. Input an integer in the range of 1 to 255 to specify the number of samples. 6. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page 2-2 to finalize the procedure. u To configure a setup for Photogate and Smart Pulley 1.
PAGE 351
2-8 Using the Setup Wizard k Outputting the Waveform of a Function through the Speaker Normally, the Setup Wizard helps you configure setups for sensors connected to the EA-200. If you select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)] on the “Select Sensor” screen, however, it configures the EA-200 to output the sound that corresponds to a function that you input and graph on the calculator. u To configure a setup for speaker output 1.
PAGE 352
2-9 Using the Setup Wizard 7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function. • This graphs the function and displays a vertical cursor line as shown below. Use the graph to specify the range that you want to output to the speaker. 8. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the output, and then press w to register it. 9. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the end point of the output, and then press w to register it.
PAGE 353
2-10 Using the Setup Wizard 14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do. To change the output frequency and try again: Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above steps from step 10. To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again: Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from step 8.
PAGE 354
3-1 Using Advanced Setup 3 Using Advanced Setup Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can adjust to configure the EA-200 setup that suits your particular needs. The procedures in this section provide the general steps you should perform when using Advanced Setup to configure an EA-200 setup, and to returns setup settings to their initial default values.
PAGE 355
3-2 Using Advanced Setup • d(Trigger) ...... Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger) conditions. See “Trigger Setup” on page 3-8 for more information. • e(Graph) ....... Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph Setup” on page 3-13 for more information. • You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults”. 6.
PAGE 356
3-3 Using Advanced Setup k Channel Setup The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). u To configure Channel Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press b(Channel). • This displays the Channel Setup screen. Currently selected channel Channel Setup Screen 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting you want to change. 3.
PAGE 357
3-4 Using Advanced Setup • From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select [Gate] or [Pulley]. [Gate] ............... Select this option when using the Photogate sensor alone. [Pulley] ............. Select this option when using the Photogate sensor along with a smart pulley. 4(None) ......... Select this option to disable the SONIC channel. • Mic Channel For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
PAGE 358
3-5 Using Advanced Setup k Sample Setup The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling. u To configure Sample Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press c(Sample). • This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the “Mode” line highlighted, which indicates that you can select the sampling mode. 2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
PAGE 359
3-6 Using Advanced Setup 3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press 1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval. • The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting. If this sampling mode is selected: Realtime This is the allowable setting range: 0.
PAGE 360
3-7 Using Advanced Setup 6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w. • This returns to the Advanced Setup menu. Note • Whenever the current Channel Setup (page 3-3) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings become incompatible due to a change in Sample Setup settings, these settings revert automatically to their initial defaults.
PAGE 361
3-8 Using Advanced Setup k Trigger Setup You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w key operation, etc.) The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”, which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen. The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
PAGE 362
3-9 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Trigger Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press d(Trigger). • This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted. • The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode selected with Sample Setup (page 3-5). The above screen shows the function menu when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode. 2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
PAGE 363
3-10 Using Advanced Setup 3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was selected in step 2. If this is the trigger source: Do this next: [EXE] key Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu. Count Down Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the countdown start time” below. CH1 Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction.
PAGE 364
3-11 Using Advanced Setup u To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling mode (page 3-5). 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel Setup (page 3-3) Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor 3.
PAGE 365
3-12 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Photogate trigger start and end settings Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source. 1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”. 2. Press one of the function keys described below. To specify this Photogate status: Photogate closed Press this key: 1(Close) Photogate open 2(Open) 3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”. 4. Press one of the function keys described below.
PAGE 366
3-13 Using Advanced Setup k Graph Setup Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page 3-5) to turn graphing on or off. u To configure Graph Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press e(Graph). • This displays the Graph Setup screen. Currently selected item Graph Setup Screen 2.
PAGE 367
3-14 Using Advanced Setup 5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “RealScroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below. To specify this real-time scrolling setting: Real-time scrolling on Press this key: 1(On) Real-time scrolling off 2(Off) 6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
PAGE 368
4-1 Using a Custom Probe 4 Using a Custom Probe You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with the EA200. The term “custom probe” means any sensor other than the CASIO or Vernier sensors specified as standard for the E-CON2 Mode. k Configuring a Custom Probe Setup To configure a custom probe setup, you must input values for the constants of the fixed linear interpolation formula (ax + b). The required constants are slope (a) and intercept (b).
PAGE 369
4-2 Using a Custom Probe 6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup. • To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want. (1) Slope Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula. (2) Intercept Press 1(EDIT) to input the intercept for the linear interpolation formula.
PAGE 370
4-3 Using a Custom Probe k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe setup based on two actual samples. Important! • Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose measurement values are known. • When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4.
PAGE 371
4-4 Using a Custom Probe 4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds. • This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value. 5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press w. • This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the same type of screen that appeared in step 3.
PAGE 372
4-5 Using a Custom Probe 8. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99. • This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list. k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual sample using the applicable custom probe. u To zero adjust a custom probe 1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to zero adjust to CH1 of the EA-200. 2.
PAGE 373
4-6 Using a Custom Probe 4. At the point your want to perform zero adjustment (the point that the displayed value is the appropriate zero adjust value), press w. • This will return to the custom probe setup screen. • The E-CON2 will set the intercept value automatically based on the sampled value. The automatically configured value will appear on the custom probe setup screen, where you can view it. 5. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
PAGE 374
5-1 Using the MULTIMETER Mode 5 Using the MULTIMETER Mode You can use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure a channel so that EA-200 MULTIMETER Mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation. u To use the MULTIMETER Mode 1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable EA-200 channels. 2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using. 3.
PAGE 375
6-1 Using Setup Memory 6 Using Setup Memory Creating EA-200 setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data. You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
PAGE 376
6-2 Using Setup Memory 2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM). If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting the setup name. 3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name. 4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99). • If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4), this saves the setup and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4).
PAGE 377
6-3 Using Setup Memory u To recall a setup and use it for sampling Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200. 1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200. 2. Turn on EA-200 power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate EA-200 channel. 4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled. 5. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 6.
PAGE 378
6-4 Using Setup Memory u To delete setup data 1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want. 3. Press 4(DEL). 4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the setup. • To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No). u To recall setup data Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area.
PAGE 379
7-1 Using Program Converter 7 Using Program Converter Program Converter converts an EA-200 setup you configured using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2 *1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information about how to use a converted program.
PAGE 380
7-2 Using Program Converter 2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name. Note Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one below. • Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series • Associated Data Logger: EA-200 • Calibration: None • Password: None If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3 through 7 and go directly to step 8.
PAGE 381
7-3 Using Program Converter 5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Logger, specify whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key operations to configure the desired setting.
PAGE 382
7-4 Using Program Converter k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on the CFX-9850) on the E-CON2, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program. Conversion can be performed using the program converter. EA-200 Control Program for CFX-9850 Series Convert EA-200 Control Program for fx-9860 Series u To convert a program 1.
PAGE 383
7-5 Using Program Converter 5. Enter up to eight characters for the program name. • If you want to password protect the program, perform steps 6 and 7 under “To convert a setup to a program” after inputting the program name. 6. Press w to start conversion of the program. • The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message, press w or J.
PAGE 384
8-1 Starting a Sampling Operation 8 Starting a Sampling Operation The section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON2 Mode to start an EA-200 sampling operation. k Before getting started... Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200. 1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200. 2. Turn on EA-200 power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate EA-200 channel. 4.
PAGE 385
8-2 Starting a Sampling Operation u To start sampling 1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described below. ✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen (page 2-4) is on the display, press b(Start Setup). ✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 1(STRT). ✔ If the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 4(STRT).
PAGE 386
Clock Period Extended Sound Normal Fast Real-time Mode 1. EA-200 Setup Starts Sampling 2. Start Standby Pressing 1 advances to “4. Graphing”. Pressing w there returns to “3. Sampling”. • The screen shown below appears when CH1, SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger. 3. Sampling 1 Outputting through speaker w Sample values is stored as List data only. The following three graph types can be produced when Photogate-Pulley is being used. 1. Time and distance graph 2.
PAGE 387
9-1 Using Sample Data Memory 9 Using Sample Data Memory Performing an EA-200 sampling operation from the E-CON2 Mode causes sampled results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON2 memory. Separate data is saved for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s “current data”. Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is replaced by the newly sampled data.
PAGE 388
9-2 Using Sample Data Memory 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want to save, and then press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting a data name. 4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number. 5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
PAGE 389
9-3 Using Sample Data Memory u To rename an existing sample data file Note • You cannot use this procedure to rename a current data file name. 1. On the E-CON2 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH). • This displays the Graph Mode screen. 2. Press 2(DATA). • This displays the Sampling Data List screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to rename, and then press 3(REN). • This displays the screen for inputting a file name. 4.
PAGE 390
10-1 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data. k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
PAGE 391
10-2 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis mode to drawing a graph. Note • Step 4 through step 6 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings. • If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top line of the Graph Mode screen.
PAGE 392
10-3 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 4. Specify the sampled data for graphing. a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASGN) or w. • This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file you selected. Sample data file name Graph on/off indicator Name of sensor used for sampling Graph Mode Screen b.
PAGE 393
10-4 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want. To specify this graph style: Press this key: Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers 1( ) 2( ) Line graph with X (×) data markers 3( ) Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers 4( ) Scatter graph with square ( 5( ) 6( ) Line graph with square ( ) data markers ) data markers Scatter graph with X (×) data markers c.
PAGE 394
11-1 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after drawing a graph. You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page 10-2.
PAGE 395
11-2 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations Key Operation Description K3(EDIT) Displays a menu of functions for zooming and editing a particular graph when the graph screen contains multiple graphs. See “Working with Multiple Graphs” on page 11-10. K4(CALC) Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression to determine the tendency of a graph.
PAGE 396
11-3 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Using Trace Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph. You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha-Memory values. u To use trace 1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRCE).
PAGE 397
11-4 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha-Memory variables. • This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency] values. • The initial default variable name settings are “S” for the period and “H” for the periodic frequency. To change to another variable name, use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item you want to change, and then press the applicable letter key. 5.
PAGE 398
11-5 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Press w. • This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode. • The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode. To do this: Enlarge the graph image horizontally Press this cursor key: e Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d Enlarge the graph image vertically f Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c 4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
PAGE 399
11-6 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. After everything is the way you want, press w. • This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the graph screen. • For details about using list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”. Note • Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SEL) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
PAGE 400
11-7 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier series expansion, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series. / 5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series. 6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
PAGE 401
11-8 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Performing Regression You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic, Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic. For details about these regression types, see page 6-12 through 6-14 under Chapter 6 of this manual. The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression.
PAGE 402
11-9 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. Press 6(DRAW). • This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph. • To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls). k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph Use the following procedure when you want to overlay a Y=f(x) graph on the sampled result graph. u To overlay a Y=f(x) graph on an existing graph 1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 5(Y=fx).
PAGE 403
11-10 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. After the graph function list settings are configured the way you want, press 6(DRAW). • This overlays graphs of all the functions for which graphing is turned on, over the graph that was originally on the graph screen. / Original Graph Overlaid with Y=f(x) Graph • To delete the overlaid graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls).
PAGE 404
11-11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen. 4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen. 5. Press w.
PAGE 405
11-12 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations u To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display 1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT). • This displays the [EDIT] menu. 2. Press 2(MOVE). • This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear. 4.
PAGE 406
11-13 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker, and then press w. • After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown below appears on the display. / 4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want. • The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%.
PAGE 407
11-14 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Configuring View Window Parameters Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View Window function key menu along the bottom of the display. Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to configure. Function Key Description 1(Auto) Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
PAGE 408
12-1 Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity 12 Calling E-CON2 Functions from an eActivity You can call E-CON2 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips. u Econ SetupWizard strip This strip calls the E-CON2 Setup Wizard. The Econ Setup Wizard strip makes it possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: EA-200 setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
PAGE 409
E-CON3 Application (English) (fx-9860GII SD, fx-9860GII, fx-9860G AU PLUS)
PAGE 410
Important! • Do not install Add-in E-CON2 on a calculator that has E-CON3 installed. Doing so may cause operational problems. • All explanations in this section assume that you are fully familiar with all calculator and Data Logger (CMA CLAB* or CASIO EA-200) precautions, terminology, and operational procedures. • The E-CON3 application is designed to get the most out of the measurement functions of the CASIO EA-200 Data Logger.
PAGE 411
1-1 E-CON3 Overview 1 E-CON3 Overview • From the Main Menu, select E-CON3 to enter the E-CON3 Mode. E-CON3 Main Menu • The “E-CON3 Mode” provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data sampling using a Data Logger. • 1(SET) ......... Displays a screen for setting up a Data Logger. • 2(MEM)........ Displays a screen for saving Data Logger setup data under a file name. • 3(PROG) ..... Performs program conversion.
PAGE 412
2-1 Using the Setup Wizard 2 Using the Setup Wizard This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the Data Logger setup quickly and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear. If you need more control over specific sampling parameters, you should consider using the Advanced Setup procedure on page 3-1. k Setup Wizard Parameters Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three Data Logger basic sampling parameters using an interactive wizard format.
PAGE 413
2-2 Using the Setup Wizard u To configure a Data Logger setup using Setup Wizard Before getting started... • Before starting the procedure below, make sure you first decide if you want to start sampling immediately using the setup you configure with Setup Wizard, or if you want to store the setup for later sampling. • See sections 6-1, 7-1, and 8-1 of this chapter (E-CON3 Application) for information about procedures required to start sampling and to store a setup.
PAGE 414
2-3 Using the Setup Wizard If you select this sensor/option: Go here for more information: [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] “Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency Characteristics) Data Sampling” on page 2-4 [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only] [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate] or [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Gate] “To configure a setup for Photogate alone” on page 2-5 [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] or [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] “To configure a setup for Photogate and
PAGE 415
2-4 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency Characteristics) Data Sampling (EA-200 only) When you perform sound sampling executed the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by specifying [CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three options: [Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and volume (vertical axis).
PAGE 416
2-5 Using the Setup Wizard k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a Photogate Setup Connection of a Vernier or CMA Photogate requires configuration of setup parameters that are slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors. u To configure a setup for Photogate alone 1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard. • This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box. 2. If you are using a Vernier Photogate alone, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
PAGE 417
2-6 Using the Setup Wizard u To configure a setup for Photogate and Smart Pulley 1. On the E-CON3 main menu, press 1(SET)1(WIZ) to start the setup wizard. 2. This displays the “Select Sensor” dialog box. 3. If you are using a Vernier Photogate with Pulley, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] [Pulley]. When the “Select Channel” dialog box appears, advance to step 4 of this procedure. If you are using a CMA Photogate with Pulley, select [CMA] - [Photogate] - [Pulley].
PAGE 418
2-7 Using the Setup Wizard 6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input. • Note that the angle unit is always radians. • Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the range of –1.5 to +1.5. 7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function. • This graphs the function and displays a vertical cursor line as shown below. Use the graph to specify the range that you want to output to the speaker. 8.
PAGE 419
2-8 Using the Setup Wizard 13. Press w. • This displays a screen like the one shown below. 14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do. To change the output frequency and try again: Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above steps from step 10. To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again: Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from step 8.
PAGE 420
3-1 Using Advanced Setup 3 Using Advanced Setup Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can adjust to configure the Data Logger setup that suits your particular needs. The procedures in this section provide the general steps you should perform when using Advanced Setup to configure a Data Logger setup, and to returns setup settings to their initial default values.
PAGE 421
3-2 Using Advanced Setup • d(Trigger)........Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger) conditions. See “Trigger Setup” on page 3-8 for more information. • e(Graph) .........Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph Setup” on page 3-13 for more information. • You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults”. 6.
PAGE 422
3-3 Using Advanced Setup k Channel Setup The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). u To configure Channel Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press b(Channel). • This displays the Channel Setup screen. Currently selected channel Channel Setup Screen 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting you want to change. 3.
PAGE 423
3-4 Using Advanced Setup • From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select [Gate] or [Pulley]. [Gate] ................Select this option when using the Photogate sensor alone. [Pulley] ..............Select this option when using the Photogate sensor along with a smart pulley. 5(None) ......... Select this option to disable the SONIC channel. • Mic Channel (EA-200 only) For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
PAGE 424
3-5 Using Advanced Setup k Sample Setup The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling. u To configure Sample Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press c(Sample). • This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the “Mode” line highlighted, which indicates that you can select the sampling mode. 2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
PAGE 425
3-6 Using Advanced Setup 3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press 1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval. • The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting. If this sampling mode is selected: This is the allowable setting range: Realtime 0.
PAGE 426
3-7 Using Advanced Setup 6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w. • This returns to the Advanced Setup menu. Note • Whenever the current Channel Setup (page 3-3) and Trigger Setup (page 3-8) settings become incompatible due to a change in Sample Setup settings, these settings revert automatically to their initial defaults.
PAGE 427
3-8 Using Advanced Setup k Trigger Setup You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w key operation, etc.) The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”, which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen. The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
PAGE 428
3-9 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Trigger Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press d(Trigger). • This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the “Source” line highlighted. • The function menu items that appears in the menu bar depend on the sampling mode selected with Sample Setup (page 3-5). The above screen shows the function menu when “Normal” is selected as the sample sampling mode. 2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
PAGE 429
3-10 Using Advanced Setup 3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was selected in step 2. If this is the trigger source: Do this next: [EXE] key Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu. Count Down Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the countdown start time” below. CH1 Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction.
PAGE 430
3-11 Using Advanced Setup u To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling mode (page 3-5). 1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”. 2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is value that data needs to attain before sampling starts. Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel Setup (page 3-3) Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor 3.
PAGE 431
3-12 Using Advanced Setup u To configure Photogate trigger start and end settings Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source. 1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”. 2. Press one of the function keys described below. To specify this Photogate status: Press this key: Photogate closed 1(Close) Photogate open 2(Open) 3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”. 4. Press one of the function keys described below.
PAGE 432
3-13 Using Advanced Setup k Graph Setup Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page 3-5) to turn graphing on or off. u To configure Graph Setup settings 1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press e(Graph). • This displays the Graph Setup screen. Currently selected item Graph Setup Screen 2.
PAGE 433
3-14 Using Advanced Setup 5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “RealScroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below. To specify this real-time scrolling setting: Press this key: Real-time scrolling on 1(On) Real-time scrolling off 2(Off) 6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
PAGE 434
4-1 Using a Custom Probe 4 Using a Custom Probe You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with a Data Logger. Important! • The sensors (CASIO, Vernier, CMA) that appear on the list during Channel Setup (page 3-3) are E-CON3 mode standard sensors. If you want to use a sensor that is not included in the list, configure custom probe settings. • A sensor with an output voltage in the range of 0 to 5 volts can be configured with E-CON3 as a custom probe.
PAGE 435
4-2 Using a Custom Probe 5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press E. • This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”. 6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup. • To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want. (1) Slope Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
PAGE 436
4-3 Using a Custom Probe k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe setup based on two actual samples. Important! • Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose measurement values are known. • When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4.
PAGE 437
4-4 Using a Custom Probe 4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds. • This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value. 5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press w. • This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the same type of screen that appeared in step 3.
PAGE 438
4-5 Using a Custom Probe k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual sample using the applicable custom probe. u To zero adjust a custom probe 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the custom probe you want to zero adjust to CH1 of the Data Logger. 2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
PAGE 439
4-6 Using a Custom Probe k Managing Custom Probe Setups Use the procedures in this section to edit and delete existing custom probe setups. u To edit a custom probe setup 1. Display the Custom Probe List. 2. Select the custom probe setup whose configuration you want to edit. • Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the custom probe you want. 3. Press 2(EDIT). • This displays the screen for configuring a custom probe setup.
PAGE 440
5-1 Using the MULTIMETER Mode 5 Using the MULTIMETER Mode You can use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure a channel so that Data Logger MULTIMETER Mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation. u To use the MULTIMETER Mode 1. Connect the calculator and Data Logger, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable Data Logger channels. 2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1), use the Channel Setup screen (page 3-3) to configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using. 3.
PAGE 441
6-1 Using Setup Memory 6 Using Setup Memory Creating Data Logger setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data. You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
PAGE 442
6-2 Using Setup Memory 2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM). If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting the setup name. 3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name. 4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99). • If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen, this saves the setup and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen.
PAGE 443
6-3 Using Setup Memory u To recall a setup and use it for sampling Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled. 5. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 6.
PAGE 444
6-4 Using Setup Memory u To delete setup data 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 2(MEM) to display the setup memory list. 2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want. 3. Press 4(DEL). 4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the setup. • To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No). u To recall setup data Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area.
PAGE 445
7-1 Using Program Converter 7 Using Program Converter Program Converter converts a Data Logger setup you configured using Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2 *1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information about how to use a converted program.
PAGE 446
7-2 Using Program Converter 2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name. Note Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one below. • Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series • Associated Data Logger: EA-200 • Calibration: None • Password: None If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3 through 7 and go directly to step 8.
PAGE 447
7-3 Using Program Converter 5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Logger, specify whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key operations to configure the desired setting.
PAGE 448
7-4 Using Program Converter k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on the CFX-9850) on the E-CON3, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program. Conversion can be performed using the program converter. EA-200 Control Program for CFX-9850 Series Convert EA-200 Control Program for fx-9860 Series u To convert a program 1.
PAGE 449
8-1 Starting a Sampling Operation 8 Starting a Sampling Operation The section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-CON3 Mode to start a Data Logger sampling operation. k Before getting started... Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with a Data Logger. 1. Connect the calculator to a Data Logger. 2. Turn on Data Logger power. 3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the appropriate Data Logger channel. 4.
PAGE 450
8-2 Starting a Sampling Operation u To start sampling 1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described below. ✔ If the final Setup Wizard screen is on the display, press b(Start Setup). ✔ If the Advanced Setup menu (page 3-1) is on the display, press 1(STRT). ✔ If the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1) is on the display, press 4(STRT).
PAGE 451
Clock Period Extended Sound Normal Fast Real-time Mode 1. Data Logger Setup Starts Sampling 2. Start Standby Pressing 1 advances to “4. Graphing”. Pressing w there returns to “3. Sampling”. • The screen shown below appears when CH1, SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger. 3. Sampling 1 Outputting through speaker w Sample values is stored as List data only. The following three graph types can be produced when Photogate-Pulley is being used. 1. Time and distance graph 2.
PAGE 452
9-1 Using Sample Data Memory 9 Using Sample Data Memory Performing a Data Logger sampling operation from the E-CON3 Mode causes sampled results to be stored in the “current data area” of E-CON3 memory. Separate data is saved for each channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s “current data”. Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is replaced by the newly sampled data.
PAGE 453
9-2 Using Sample Data Memory 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want to save, and then press 2(SAVE). • This displays the screen for inputting a data name. 4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number. 5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
PAGE 454
9-3 Using Sample Data Memory u To rename an existing sample data file Note • You cannot use this procedure to rename a current data file name. 1. On the E-CON3 main menu (page 1-1), press 5(GRPH). • This displays the Graph Mode screen. 2. Press 2(DATA). • This displays the Sampling Data List screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the data file you want to rename, and then press 3(REN). • This displays the screen for inputting a file name. 4.
PAGE 455
10-1 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 10 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data. k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
PAGE 456
10-2 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis mode to drawing a graph. Note • Step 4 through step 6 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step automatically applies the initial default values for its settings. • If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top line of the Graph Mode screen.
PAGE 457
10-3 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data 4. Specify the sampled data for graphing. a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASGN) or w. • This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file you selected. Sample data file name Graph on/off indicator Name of sensor used for sampling Graph Mode Screen b.
PAGE 458
10-4 Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want. To specify this graph style: Press this key: Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers 1( ) 2( ) Line graph with X (×) data markers 3( ) Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers 4( ) Scatter graph with square ( 5( ) 6( ) Line graph with square ( ) data markers ) data markers Scatter graph with X (×) data markers c.
PAGE 459
11-1 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after drawing a graph. You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation, or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on page 10-2.
PAGE 460
11-2 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations Key Operation Description K4(CALC) Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression to determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page 11-6, and “Performing Regression” on page 11-8. K5(Y=fx) Displays the graph function list, which lets you select a Y=f(x) graph to overlay on the sampled result graph.
PAGE 461
11-3 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Using Trace Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph. You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha-Memory values. u To use trace 1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRCE).
PAGE 462
11-4 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha-Memory variables. • This displays a dialog box for specifying variable names for [Period] and [Frequency] values. • The initial default variable name settings are “S” for the period and “H” for the periodic frequency. To change to another variable name, use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item you want to change, and then press the applicable letter key. 5.
PAGE 463
11-5 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Press w. • This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode. • The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode. To do this: Press this cursor key: Enlarge the graph image horizontally e Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d Enlarge the graph image vertically f Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c 4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
PAGE 464
11-6 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. After everything is the way you want, press w. • This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the graph screen. • For details about using list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”. Note • Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SEL) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
PAGE 465
11-7 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier series expansion, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series. / 5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w. • This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of the Fourier series. 6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
PAGE 466
11-8 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Performing Regression You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic, Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic. For details about these regression types, see page 6-12 through 6-14 under Chapter 6 of this manual. The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression.
PAGE 467
11-9 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 5. Press 6(DRAW). • This draws a quadratic regression graph and overlays it over the original graph. • To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls). k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph Use the following procedure when you want to overlay a Y=f(x) graph on the sampled result graph. u To overlay a Y=f(x) graph on an existing graph 1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 5(Y=fx).
PAGE 468
11-10 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 4. After the graph function list settings are configured the way you want, press 6(DRAW). • This overlays graphs of all the functions for which graphing is turned on, over the graph that was originally on the graph screen. / Original Graph Overlaid with Y=f(x) Graph • To delete the overlaid graph, press !4(SKTCH) and then 1(Cls).
PAGE 469
11-11 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass cursor ( ) in the center of the screen. 4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen. 5. Press w.
PAGE 470
11-12 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations u To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display 1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT). • This displays the [EDIT] menu. 2. Press 2(MOVE). • This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen. 3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is displayed, and then press w. • This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear. 4.
PAGE 471
11-13 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations 3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker, and then press w. • After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown below appears on the display. / 4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want. • The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%.
PAGE 472
11-14 Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations k Configuring View Window Parameters Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View Window function key menu along the bottom of the display. Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to configure. Function Key Description 1(Auto) Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
PAGE 473
12-1 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity 12 Calling E-CON3 Functions from an eActivity You can call E-CON3 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips. u Econ SetupWizard strip This strip calls the E-CON3 Setup Wizard. The Econ Setup Wizard strip makes it possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: Data Logger setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
PAGE 474
Manufacturer: CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan Responsible within the European Union: Casio Europe GmbH Casio-Platz 1, 22848 Norderstedt, Germany www.casio-europe.
PAGE 475
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD. 6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan SA2010-C © 2014 CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.